Home

User`s Manual FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator

Contents

1. Relative Parameter Mnemonic VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW Index 1 2 3 4 1 ST REV S Tests 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT KEY 1 5 MODE BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK ERR 2 2 7 IPV 5 5 8 sP 5 5 9 Tom 5 5 10 PV SCALE 1 11 OUT_SCALE 11 12 GRANT DENY 2 13 CONTROL OPTS 2 14 STATUS OPTS 2 15 TIN 5 16 pv FTIME 4 17 BYPASS 1 18 CASIN 5 5 19 SP RATE DN 4 20 SP RATE UP 4 21 SP HI UM 4 22 SP LO LIM 4 23 GAIN 4 24 RESET 4 25 BAL TIME 4 26 RATE 4 27 BKCAL IN 5 28 Tour HI UM 4 29 Tor LO LIM 4 30 BKCAL HYS 4 31 BKCAL OUT 5 32 RCAS IN 5 33 ROUT IN 5 34 SHED OPT 1 35 RCAS OUT 5 36 Tour OUT 5 37 TRK SCALE 11 38 TRK IN D 2 2 39 TRK VAL 5 5 40 FF VAL 5 41 IFE SCALE 11 42 FF GAIN 4 43 UPDATE_EVT 44 BLOCK ALM 45 ALARM SUM 8 8 46 ACK OPTION 2 47 ALARM HYS 4 48 HI HI PRI 1 49 HI HI LIM 4 50 HI PRI 1 51 HI UN 4 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block gt A6 1 Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block The MAO function block passes multiple input signal data The FVX uses it as a means to pass data to LCD Transducer Block A6 1 Function Block Diagram MAO Multiple Analog Output Ta SELECTOR IN 2 b EN OUTPUT SNAP Transfers data to TO LCD Transducer Block IN A gt IN X i LA via CHANNEL
2. Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD m B a r m i l S 1646 mBara 7 1682 mils yr I yr KSE 3 2 m m 1647 1 32 mec Wists 1683 mm yr I yr 1648 kgal k gal k m p 1649 kImpGal Gal 1650 WT WT V o I 1651 Vol 96 b f 1652 Ibf in f psum Mf t 1653 Mft3 d d M m 1654 Mm3 d d a c 1655 ac in s io n Go as a c 1656 ac in m jm om a c 1657 ac in h own Jg a c 1658 ac in d ion fod a c 659 ac ft s Pap GE a c 1660 ac ft m CL d im a c 1661 ac ft h f t J oh a c 1662 ac ft d f t d 1663 Mft3 Mf t 1664 Mbbl M b b I a c 1665 ac in RES a c 1666 ac ft f t 1667 Mgal M g a I 1668 Mm3 d M m 1669 Vol Vol 1670 LEL L EL 1671 L m3 Li m m g 1672 mg m3 ifm d 1673 mL L om UI L m L 1674 mL m3 jo mp 1675 ubar u Bear 1676 ug L u oi L u g 1677 ug m3 Z m 1678 uL L u LOY L H E 1679 uL m3 m 1680 S cm 58 Pom 1681 rH IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 8 Explanation of Basic Items switching displays gt 8 1 8 Explanation of Basic Items switching displays Turn the scroll knob on the outside of the case to switch displays Display switching on the FVX110 is of two modes depending on the speed of turning the scroll knob Single scroll mode when one display is switched to another or continuous scroll mode scan mode when displays are switched continuously during a set cycle By c
3. Index cae pos oo Pion Write Valid Range Description 0 8000 8100 Block Header TAG PID Block Tag Information on this block such as Block O S Tag DD Revision Execution Time etc 1 8001 8101 ST REV The revision level of the static data associated with the function block The revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block is changed 2 8002 8102 TAG DESC Null The user description of the intended application of the block 3 8003 8103 STRATEGY 1 The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 4 8004 8104 ALERT KEY 1 1 to 255 The identification number of the plant unit This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms etc 5 8005 8105 MODE BLK A universal parameter that represents block operating condition It comprises the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 6 8006 8106 BLOCK ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 7 8007 8107 PV Measured value the non dimensional value that is converted from the input IN value based on the PV SCALE values and filtered 8 8008 8108 SP 0 AUTO PV SCALE 10 Setpoint 9 8009 8109 OUT MAN Output 10 8010
4. 188 7 40 60 2 36 50 110 4 33 1 97 7 3 Scroll knob 12 39 Re Conduit ti 0 47 1 54 Ongukconnechon i Conduit connection l A A c N EN i S e 2 EN N E pad pM oO N N IS e eo I e S amp S pm K Di S 5 e Q N Q e o e 9 3 ED S NY i D T 3 Ground termina E m va Bod 4 CL N OVN 2 inch pipe LA O D 60 5 mm Mounting bracket 54 B optional F 12 129 5 08 T 0 47 Electrical connection for code 5 9 Aand D Eia e Terminal Configuration e Terminal Wiring Communication terminals connection hook SUPPLY Power supply and output terminal Ground terminal F1303 ai SUPPLY lt Factory Setting gt SUPPLY Tag Number As specified in order Tag plate Software Tag UI1001 unless otherwise both Tag PD TAG Number and software Tag specified in order Node Address 0xF5 unless otherwise specified in order Operation BASIC or as specified Functional Class IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 1 Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block The Signal Characterizer SC block is used to A1 1 Schematic Diagram of convert the values of input signals according to a r line segment function The line segment function Signal Characterizer Block is created using 21 points of the X Y coordinates T
5. Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 1142 psia psi a 1178 MWsh M We h 1143 psig psi g 1179 kWeh k We h 1144 g cm2 m 1180 cal c a l k g 1145 k cm2 See up 22 1181 kcal keai 1146 inH20 i n H 2 o 1182 Mcal Meal i n H 2 O 1147 inH2O 4 C 4 1183 Btu Bt u i n H2 O 4 d e c a 148 inH2O 68 F 6 8 F 1184 decatherm tod worm f t 1149 mmH20 mmH 2 o 1185 ft Ib b m mH 2 O 1150 mmH20 4 C 4 c 1186 WwW w m mH 2 O 1151 mmH20 68 F REI 1187 TW T wW 1152 ftH20 f t H2 o 1188 GW G w f t H 2 0 1153 ftH2O 4 C 4 1189 MW MW f t H 2 0 1154 ftH2O 68 F 6 8 F 1190 kW k w 1155 inHg i n Hg 1191 mW m W i n H 1156 inHg 0 C d ue 1 1192 uw a A 1157 mmHg m mH o 1193 nw n W m m H 1158 mmHg 0 C 0 1194 pw pw M c a I 1159 Paes p d ng 1195 Mcal h h 1160 m2 s mz ds 1196 MJ h M J h B t u 1161 P P 1197 Btu h h 1162 cP c P 1198 hp h p W 1163 St S t 1199 W m K Cm K WI 1164 cSt c St 1200 W m2 K m K m es K 1165 N m N m 1201 m2 K W I Ww 1166 mN m m NI m 1202 J K JIi K 1167 J J 1203 kJ K k J 1 K n J 1 168 EJ E J 1204 J kg K ko K k J 1169 PJ P J 1205 kJ kg K k g gt 1170 Td T J 1206 J kg JIi kg M J 1171 GJ G J 1207 MJ kg I kg k J 1172 MJ M J 1208 KJ kg kg 1173 kJ k J 1209 A A 1174 mJ i cal 1210 kA k A 1175 Weh Weoh 1211 mA m A 1176 TWeh T We h 1212 pA I A 1177 GWeh G We h 1213
6. SELECTION IN 1 23 p CA A gt C OUT 32 5 IN_3 45 S IN_4 2 34 p rq E gt C SELECTED 7 IN 62155 EI IN 72325 O dx SELECT TYPE Maximum DISABLE 1 OFF gt ee DISABLE_2 ON MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 ON p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF j DISABLE_8 OFF p OP_SELECT 0 p FA0306 ai Figure A3 6 Example 5 Because DISABLE_2 and DISABLE_3 are ON IN_2 and IN_3 are disabled and the IN with the maximum value among the remaining IN_n is selected for output In the above example since IN_7 has the maximum value among the remaining valid INs it is output IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 9 When SELECT TYPE is Middle If there is more than one valid input and the number of such input is an odd number the value of the middle input will be transmitted to OUT If there is an even number of valid inputs the average of the middle two inputs is transmitted to OUT If the average is used for OUT the block transmits 0 to SELECTED while it transmits the number of the input used for the middle for other cases If the number of valid inputs is 1 it is irrelevant to selection by Middle selector action The following shows an example of selection by Middle selector action If there is
7. pe Parameter Name Sub In Eege Name ir o Access Remarks 378 DLME LINK MASTER CAPABILITIES VARIABLE 0x04 RW 379 DLME LINK 0 RW MASTER INFO 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 0 RECORD 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 100 3 DefTokenHoldTime 300 4 TargetTokenRotTime 4096 5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 400 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 5000 7 MaximumlnactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 6000 380 PRIMARY LINK MASTER FLAG VARIABLE 0 RW LAS True OxFF non LAS False 0x00 381 LIVE LIST STATUS ARRAY VARIABLE 0 R 382 MAX TOKEN 0 RW HOLD TIME 1 Element1 0x0000 x16 ARRAY 0x012c x16 2 Element2 0x012c x5 0x0000 x27 3 Element3 0x0000 x32 4 Element4 0x0000 x32 5 Element5 0x0000 x32 6 Elemente 0x0000 x32 7 Element 0x0000 x31 0x012c x1 8 Element8 0x012c x32 383 BOOT OPERAT FUNCTIONAL CLASS Specified at the time RW 0x01 basic device of order 0x02 LM 384 CURRENT LINK JO R Settings for LAS SETTING RECORD 4 SlotTime 0 2 PerDIpduPhlOverhead 0 3 MaxResponseDelay 0 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 0 5 ThisLink 0 6 MinInterPduDelay 0 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld 0 8 PreambleExtension 0 9 PostTransGapExtension 0 10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 0 11 TimeSyncClass 0 385 CONFIGURED_ 0 RW LINK_SETTING_ 1 SlotTime 12 Oxc RECORD 2 PerDIpduPhlOverhead 4 0x4 3 MaxResponseDelay 5 0x5 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 37 0x25 5 ThisLink 0 0x0 6 MinInterPduDelay 12 Oxc 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld
8. eene A8 3 A8 7 Lesser A8 3 A8 8 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download A8 4 A8 9 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software DOW E A8 5 A8 10 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download E A8 6 Revision Information EEN i IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 1 Introduction gt 1 1 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator Your FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator was precisely calibrated at the factory before shipment To ensure both safety and efficiency please read this manual carefully before you operate the instrument Model Style code FVX110 B Regarding This Manual This manual should be provided to the end user The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without Yokogawa s written permission Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose f any question arises or errors are found or if any information is missing from this manual please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales office The specifications covered by this manual are limited to those for the standard type under the specified model number break
9. FA0309 ai Figure A3 9 Example 8 When SELECT TYPE is Latched Good The valid input with the smaller input number is selected as an output and is held until it becomes invalid When it becomes invalid the next valid input will be selected as an output regardless of the magnitude of the value Even if an input with the input number smaller than that of the currently selected input recovers the current selection is held Assuming that IN_2 is the valid input with the smallest input number the order of input selection is IN 2 IN 3 IN 8 IN 1 If the power is turned OFF and then ON with SELECT TYPE set to Latched Good input selection starts with the IN that was selected before the power was turned OFF IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 12 A3 4 Output Processing A3 4 1 Handling of SELECTED For the value output to SELECTED when OP SELECT has been selected that is not O the number specified by OP SELECT will be stored as is However 0 is stored in the SELECTED in the following cases 1 If there is no valid input 2 If the value of MIN GOOD is greater than the number of valid inputs 3 If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bitin STATUS OPTS is set 4 If the value of OP SELECT is greater than 8 which
10. FA0311 ai Figure A3 11 Example of Scheduling AI Temperature 1 Al2 Temperature 2 AI3 Temperature 3 Al4 Temperature A IS SELECT_TYPE MAX Basic operations and work sequence 1 The IS block obtains values and status information from Al 2 The block selects the Al information using the alternatives 3 The block displays and outputs the information selected by SELECTED IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 1 Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block The Arithmetic AR block switches two main inputs of different measurement ranges seamlessly and combines the result with three auxiliary inputs through the selected compensation function 10 types to calculate the output A4 1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic The diagram below shows the Arithmetic block schematic RANGE_LO ARITH_TYPE RANGE HI I BAL_TIME IN RANGE py OUT HI LIM EXTENSION M IN LO FUNCTION MAN O S PRE_OUT t 1 func GAIN t jd IN 1 IN 14BIAS IN 1 GAIN IN 1 gt ALGORITHM TYPE gt Bias S o OUT A A t2 IN 2 IN 24BIAS IN 2 GAIN IN 2 A A T OUT LO LIM IN 3 IN 34BIAS IN 3 GAIN IN 3 O O COMP_LO_LIM BIAS IN COMP HI LIM O O i GAIN IN i FA0401 ai Figure A4 1 AR Block The Arithmetic block is divided into three sections Input section Makes a go no go decision on th
11. sss 2 10 2 8 4 IECEx ee 2 13 3 Component Names i cene e osse iei bases eden Eegeregie 3 1 4 AboutFieldBUSa austin Danidaqen d dtc an p rd 4 1 4 1 eue RN 4 1 4 2 Internal Structure of FVX110 eese 4 1 4 2 1 System network Management MED 4 1 4 2 2 Function BloCk VFD irnn t RETE ee ERR NR ROME bananas 4 1 4 3 Logical Structure of Each Block eene 4 2 4 4 Wiring System Configuration cerent nnns 4 2 5 Installation e S 5 1 5 1 PreCaUtiOns r H RE 5 1 5 2 M nting ep 5 1 5 3 WINING 5 2 5 3 1 Wiring Precautloris ecrire rte itte tite ate stadt eters 5 2 5 3 2 Wiring Installation cis 4 hoo o Fo o fo eo fice res 5 2 5 4 Grounding fe og ce ccnc cn case cece ans cnn dens cuss cand dene cde eeu cunt seat sivas evst cans sens sudg cnsgcanteens cute 5 3 2nd Edition July 2011 YK IM 01S01C01 01EN All Rights Reserved Copyright 2010 Yokogawa Electric Corporation 5 5 Connection of Devices icone nnnm innuit cute eatecite 5 3 5 6 Host Setting 5 4 5 7 BUS POWER ON S 5 5 5 8 Integration of DD sis sacs cces cies sees cteccceecteccccecteccceectecceesctesscesstesserscteseersstecverestecserssies 5 6 5 9 Set the Parameters Using DTM eene 5 6 5 10 Continuous Record
12. FA0303 ai Figure A3 3 Example 2 In the above example SELECT_TYPE is set to Minimum However because OP_SELECT specifies the value and number of IN_3 the value and number of this specified IN are transmitted to OUT and SELECTED Note Even if the IN specified by OP_SELECT is an invalid input the corresponding DISABLE parameter is ON or the IN s status is bad the value and status of that IN are transmitted to OUT IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 6 A3 3 2 SELECTION Handling If the value of OP SELECT is 0 input selection using SELECT TYPE is enabled When SELECT TYPE is first good The IS block selects the input with the smallest input number among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED SELECTION IN 1 23 p Se e KC OUT 34 5 IN_3 45 p IN_4 2 34 y oe gt C SELECTED 2 IN6 15 5 O gt IN7 325 O em EL WM SELECT TYPE First Good DISABLE 1 ON gt O DISABLE_2 OFF p 4 MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 OFF DISABLE 4 OFF gt DISABLE_5 OFF gt DISABLE_6 OFF o gt DISABLE 7 OFF gt DISABLE 8 OFF gt OP SELECT 0 _ FA0304 ai Figure A3 4 Example
13. the current lo and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus Supply unit Po lt Pi Uo lt Ui los li In addition the maximum unprotected residual capacitance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus line must be equal or less than 5 nF and 10 uH respectively Ci lt 5nF Lis 10 uH Supply unit The supply unit must be certified by a Notified body as FISCO model and following trapezoidal or rectangular output characteristic is used Uo 14 17 5 V I S maximum value lo based on spark test result or other assessment No specification of Lo and Co is required on the certificate or label Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance Rc 15 150 O km Inductance per unit length Lc 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length Cc 45 200 nF km Length of spur cable max 60 m IIC and IIB Length of trunk cable max 1 km IIC or 5 km IIB Terminators The terminator must be certified by a Notified body as FISCO model and at each end of the trunk cable an approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 1020 C 0 2 2 uF 0 8 1 2 pF is required in operation The resistor must be infallible according to IEC 60079 11 Number of Devices The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the po
14. Not used by the FVX110 112 1112 PRIVATE 8 Not used by the FVX110 113 1113 PRIVATE 9 Not used by the FVX110 114 1114 PRIVATE 10 Not used by the FVX110 115 1115 PRIVATE 11 Not used by the FVX110 12 2 LCD Transducer Block Relative Index Index Parameter Name Write Factory Default Mode Explanation 0 2000 Block Header TAG LTB Block Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Revision Tag Execution Time etc O S 1 2001 ST REV AUTO Describes the revision level of parameters for setting the transducer block The revision is updated when set values are changed This parameter is used to check for parameter changes 2 2002 TAG DESC Null AUTO Auniversal parameter intended for storing comments describ ing tag data 3 2003 STRATEGY 1 AUTO Auniversal parameter used by the high level system to iden tify function blocks 4 2004 ALERT KEY 1 AUTO Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred Generally this parameter is used by a high level System to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only This is a universal parameter IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 5 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt Write Mode Relative Parameter Name Index Index Factory Default Explanation 2005 MODE_BLK AUTO A universal
15. Note 2 Wiring All wiring shall comply with National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA70 and Local Electrical Codes When installed in Division 1 FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED Note 3 Operation Keep the WARNING nameplate attached to the indicator WARNING OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE USERS MANUAL IM 01801C01 Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void Factory Mutual Explosionproof Approval IM 01S01C01 01EN b FM intrinsically safe and Nonincendive Type FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code FS15 Applicable standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 ISA60079 27 FM Intrinsically Safe Approval Entity Model Class Il amp IIl Division 1 Groups A B C D E F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class Zone 0 AEx ia IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X FISCO Model Class Il amp IIl Division 1 Groups A B C D E F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class Zone 0 AEx ia IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X Nonincendive Approval Class I Division 2
16. Output A X X6 po X5 X4 x3 eee X1 Y Input id I vi Y2Y3 Y4 Y5Y6 Y7 INFINITY Low limit High limit FA0105 ai Figure A1 5 Example of Curve for IN 2 SWAP 27 on When SWAP 2 is on the array elements of CURVE Y must be configured for a monotone increase or decrease Y1 Y2 Y3 YA Y5 YGor Yo lt Y5 lt YA lt Y3 lt Y2 lt Y1 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 5 A 1 4 List of Signal Characterizer Block Parameters Relative Index 0 Parameter BLOCK HEADER Write Mode Block Tag O S Valid Range Initial Value TAG SC View 2 3 Description Remarks Information relating to this function block such as block tag DD revision and execution time ST_REV The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Signal Characterizer block TAG_DESC Null Stores comments describing tag information STRATEGY The strategy field can be used by the high level system to identify function blocks ALERT_KEY 1 255 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has occurred MODE_BLK BLOCK_ERR Mode of the Signal Characterizer block O S Man and Auto are supported Indicates the error status of the Signal Characterizer block in bit strings OUT_1 MAN Outputs the result of the va
17. User s ENT Manual FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator IM 01S01C01 01EN vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 01S01C01 01EN 2nd Editi Yokogawa Electric Corporation i Hd FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator IM 01S01C01 01EN 2nd Edition Contents 1 tiifo s UC ot 2 ep ee ene eh ae ee ee ener eo Neer o 1 1 B Regarding This ManwWal 2 nennen nennen aane a ace 1 1 1 1 Safe Use of This Product eiiim cute sate sven cuze cite 1 1 1 2 WANT AINE EE 1 2 1 3 ATEX Documentation iiicaiiccsteccissecectits cattccvenevesciessieceteeevanciesettcsteasvenctessnecedenevene 1 3 2 Handling Cautions Nin 2 1 2 1 Model and Specifications Check esee 2 1 2 2 UnpackIng cett nn tata ete anesthe te c Ac EIE 2 1 2 3 SOLON AGG E 2 1 2 4 Selecting the Installation Location eene 2 1 2 5 Waterproofing of Cable Conduit Connections eene 2 2 2 6 Restrictions on Use of Radio Transceivers eene 2 2 2 7 Insulation Resistance and Dielectric Strength Test 2 2 2 8 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument 2 3 2 8 1 FM approval sesioan aee x E Xe M eR casts 2 3 2 8 2 CSA Certificatiori eh th Fi t o ER RR PUR FEE o nn 2 7 2 8 3 CENELEC ATEX Certification
18. proof T80 C Tamb 40 to 75 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 12 Note 2 Electrical Data Supply voltage 32 V dc max Output current 15 mA dc Note 3 Installation All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements The cable entry devices shall be of a certified flameproof type suitable for the conditions of use Note 4 Operation Keep the WARNING label attached to the indicator WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 265 C USE HEAT RESISTING CABLES290 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous location Note 5 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or part replacement by other than an authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void KEMA Flameproof Certification 2 Electrical Connection A mark indicating the electrical connection type is stamped near the electrical connection port These marks are as follows Screw Size Marking ISO M20x1 5 female AM ANSI 1 2 NPT female AN Aor AW Location of the mark F0211 ai 3 Installation A WARNING All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements and the local electrical code There is no need for a conduit seal in Division 1 and Division 2 hazardous
19. 10 IN 3 0 5 This is an input input 3 for the MAO function block 11 IN 4 0 5 This is an input input 4 for the MAO function block 12 IN 5 0 5 This is an input input 5 for the MAO function block 13 IN 6 0 5 This is an input input 6 for the MAO function block 14 IN 7 0 5 This is an input input 7 for the MAO function block 15 IN 8 0 5 This is an input input 8 for the MAO function block 16 MO OPTS 0 This is an optional parameter for specifying output operations for the MAO function block It is mainly used for specifying values to be transferred to LCD Transducer Block in fault state status 17 FSTATE TIME Positive 0 An input that has become Bad and stays in that state longer than the time set by FSTATE TIME transitions to the fault state status 18 FSTATE VAL1 0 A value transferred as input 1 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 19 FSTATE VAL2 0 A value transferred as input 2 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 20 FSTATE VAL3 0 A value transferred as input 3 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 21 FSTATE_VAL4 0 A value transferred as input 4 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 22 FSTATE_VAL5 0 A value transferred as input 5 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 23 FSTATE_VAL6 0 A value transferred as input 6 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state
20. 3 Because DISABLE 1 is ON IN 1 is disabled and IN 2 is selected for output If DISABLE 1 is turned OFF the output changes from IN 2to IN 1 That is the valid IN with the smaller input number is always selected for output IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 7 When SELECT TYPE is Minimum The IS block selects the input with the minimum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED IN 1 23 IN 2734 5 IN 3 45 IN 4 2 34 IN 5 23 6 IN 67 15 5 IN 7 32 5 IN 8 274 DISABLE 1 OFF DISABLE 2 OFF DISABLE 3 OFF DISABLE 4 OFF DISABLE 5 OFF DISABLE 6 OFF DISABLE 7 OFF DISABLE 8 OFF OP SELECT 0 Figure A3 5 Example 4 SELECTION gt OUT 2 34 gt SELECTED 4 M SELECT TYPE Minimum M STATUS OPTS l MIN GOOD 1 FA0305 ai IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 8 When SELECT TYPE is Maximum The IS block selects the input with the maximum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED
21. IT Block gt A2 7 For counting up the OUT value is as follows e OUT TOTAL SP PRE TRIP c OUT TRIP 2 0 COUT_PTRIP 0 e TOTAL SP PRE TRIP lt OUT lt TOTAL SP c OUT TRIP 2 0 COUT_PTRIP 1 e TOTAL SP lt OUT gt OUT TRIP 1 COUT PTRIP 1 For counting down the OUT value is as follows e PRE TRIP OUT gt OUT TRIP 0 COUT PTRIP 0 e 0 OUT lt PRE TRIP gt OUT TRIP 0 COUT PTRIP 1 e OUT 0 gt OUT TRIP 1 COUT PTRIP 1 Note that the given conditions do not apply to the following cases IfINTEG TYPE is 5 6 or 7 OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP always output 0 fINTEG TYPE is 1 or 3 occurrence of AutoRESET reset caused if the threshold is exceeded causes OUT TRIP to hold 1 for five seconds A2 5 3 Mode Handling Mode Action Output Automatic AUTO Normal action Normal output Manual MAN Integration calculation is stopped You may rewrite a value in OUT If no value is rewritten OUT will not be updated unless you the value just before running in AUTO is held When the Out of Service O S seta value to it No reset is accepted mode returns to AUTO integration starts with the written value or the value just before running in AUTO If you rewrite the value in OUT and RTOTAL while the mode is in MAN or O S N RESET is incremented A2 6 Reset A2 6 1 Reset Trigger There are the following five types of reset triggers 1 An integrated value exceed
22. Rating 3 FISCO For Groups C D E F and G or Group IIB Ui vmax 17 5 V dc li Imax 500 mA Pi Pmax 5 5 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH Installation requirements Po lt Pi Uo lt Ui lo lt li Co 2 Ci Ccable Lo 2 Li Lcable Vmax 2 Voc Imax 2 Isc Ca 2 Ci Ccable La 2 Li Lcable Uo lo Po Co Lo Voc Isc Ca and La are parameters of barrier 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 9 e Caution for CSA Non incendive type Following contents refer to DOC No ICS018 Installation Diagram for Non incendive or Type of protection n Division 2 Installation i RAEE ae ee 1 Terminator METERS O lo Indicator Oc Zeiss sees t O Field Instruments o i SCH Lo EE 1 Field Instruments 4 O cL NR RR t Hazardous Location EE i Non Hazardous Location Terminator E gt 06 A CSA Certified Equipment nL NEC T T el F0208 ai Note 1 Installation should be in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part and local Electrical Code Note 2 Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installed in class II and IIl environments Note 3 Do not alter drawing without authorization from CSA Electrical Data Rating including FNICO Ui or Vmax 32V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 10 2 8 3 CENELEC ATEX Certification 1 Technical Data a CE
23. SELECT TYPE Middle DISABLE 1 2 OFF O M STATUS OPTS DISABLE 22 OFF 4 MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 32 OFF DISABLE 42 OFF DISABLE 52 OFF DISABLE 62 OFF DISABLE 7 OFF DISABLE 82 ON O OP SELECT20 OG FA0308 ai Figure A3 8 Example 7 If the number of valid INs is an odd multiple the IN with the middle value will be output In the above example the IN_5 input having the middle value is output IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 11 When SELECT TYPE is Average The block calculates the average of the valid inputs and transmits it to OUT The number of inputs used to calculate its value is indicated in SELECTED SELECTION IN 1 23 p IN_2 34 5 p gt C OUT 25 48 IN 3 45 gt IN_1 IN_8 8 25 48 IN 4 2 34 p IN_5 23 6 p e gt SELECTED 8 IN 6 15 5 p IN 7232 5 p ee M SELECT TYPE Average DISABLE 1 OFF E M STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 OFF j MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 OFF p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF p DISABLE_8 OFF p OP_SELECT 0 p
24. Sends the live list data to link masters on the same segment LAS transfer Transfers the right to be the LAS on the segment to another link master A7 2 Link Master Alink master LM is any device containing a link active scheduler There must be at least one LM ona segment When the LAS on a segment has failed another LM on the same segment starts working as the LAS LM There are 3 LMs on this segment Node address 0x14 SlotTime 5 LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address 0x15 0x16 OxF1 OxF2 OxF3 OxF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 FA0701 ai Figure A7 1 Example of Fieldbus configuration 3 LMs on Same Segment IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 2 A7 3 Transfer of LAS There are two procedures for an LM to become the LAS Ifthe LM whose value of V ST xV TN is the smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS judges that there is no LAS on the segment in such a case as when the segment has started up or when the current LAS has failed the LM declares itself as the LAS then becomes the LAS With this procedure an LM backs up the LAS as shown in the following figure The LM whose value of V ST xV TN is the smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS requests the LAS on t
25. certain retained value that was output previously gt SELECTED 0 FA0302 ai This example restricts the valid inputs using DISABLE n and the inputs are enabled only at DISABLE 3 and DISABLE 5 Because the effective number of MIN Good is 3 the input specified by OP SELECT will not be output IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 5 A3 3 Selection The following processing is performed after completing input processing If the number of valid inputs is less than the value of MIN GOOD no input selection is made A3 3 1 OP SELECT Handling When a value other than 0 that is 1 to 8 is selected for OP SELECT The IS block selects the input of the number specified by OP SELECT regardless of the setting of SELECT _ TYPE propagates the value of that input to OUT and transmits the input number to SELECTED SELECTION IN 1 23 IN 2 34 5 Le WEEN IN_3 45 p IN 4 2 34 j ie gt SELECTED 3 IN 62155 D IN 72325 OD gt idc ei gt M SELECT TYPE Minimum DISABLE 1 OFF STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 OFF o I MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 OFF DISABLE 4 OFF DISABLE 5 OFF DISABLE 6 OFF o DISABLE_7 OFF op DISABLE_8 OFF o OP SELECT 3
26. et met t ERE EXER gd A4 4 A4 3 3 Average Calculation encoro cona nr a A4 4 e d E A4 4 A4 4 1 Mode Handling tr er rd rr A4 5 A44 2 StatusHandling ooh beoe eet teak A4 5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters eeeesssssss A4 6 IM 01S01C01 01EN Appendix 5 PID BIOCK ccceceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeesesenaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees A5 1 A5 1 Function Diagram eee entente tosntesntesstentesRnenRDen Ripa nip audias A5 1 A5 2 Functions of PID BIOCK cc cceseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeeneenseees A5 1 A5 3 Parameters of PID Block nennen nnne nune nune nanus A5 2 ARA PID Computation Details erret nennt nentes A5 5 A5 4 1 PV proportional and derivative Type PID I PD Control Algorithm ER A5 5 A542 PID Control Parameters ee et rr nne exea A5 5 A5 5 jonipJKerm A5 5 A5 5 1 Velocity Type Output Action seseeenen A5 5 A5 6 Direction of Control Action eese A5 5 A5 7 Control Action Bypass essent nennen rnnt nennen nnns A5 6 A5 8 Feed Zopaard 2 cides ccansdeascedsceccsserssssecscteccuterdssecssctessucertecesasstecsdtestanedeasirencves A5 6 A5 9 Block Mode S ariiraa C M A5 6 A5 9 1 lee e A5 6 A510 Bu mpless TranStet sinc sicciccccescsscccscciscavesctessct
27. omi 1106 Ib in3 ENT E 2 y d p l b 071 yd min T mem cm 1107 Ib ft3 ft t 3 b 072 in h i m bu 1108 Ib gal gal p P S T o n 073 ft h f t h 1109 STon yd3 y d R p d e g 074 yd h y d h 1110 deg Twad T wacd 4 deg B a 075 MPH M P H 1111 Deg Baum hv m hoy P d e g B a 076 m s2 mis 2 1112 dg Baum It u m l t d e g 1077 Hz H 2 1113 dep API A P I 1078 THz T Hz 1114 SGU S GU 1079 GHz G Hz 1115 kg m kg m 1080 MHz MHz 1116 mg m mg m 1081 kHz k Hz 1117 tex t e k g 1082 1 s 1 1 s 1118 kgem2 mna 1 k m 1083 1 min mp m 1119 kgem s 3 d r e 1084 revis ES 1120 N N 1085 RPM RPM 1121 MN M N r a d 1086 rad s fos 1122 kN k N 1087 1 s2 4 7 e 2 1123 mN m N 1088 kg k g 1124 uN u N 4 4 kg 089 g g 1125 kgem2 s mo S 1090 mg m g 1126 Nem Ni e om 1091 Mg M g 1127 MNem M N m 1092 t t 1128 kNem k Ne m 1093 oz Ora 1129 mNem m N om 1094 Ib b 1130 Pa Pa 1095 STon Sor m 1131 Gpa GPa 1096 Lton L T o 1132 Mpa M P a k 1097 kg m2 5 m 1133 kPa k P a M g 1098 Mg m2 E om 1134 mPa m P a k 1099 kg m2 I S m 1135 yPa u Pa 1100 g cm3 E 1136 hPa h Pa 1101 g m3 g m 1137 bar D GF 1102 t m3 t m3 1138 mbar Wb a 1103 kg L kg L 1139 torr tow deg 1104 g ml g mi 1140 atm at om 1105 g L g L 1141 psi ps i IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 11
28. the modified parameters are not saved and the settings may return to the original values Table 5 1 Operation Parameters Parameter V ST Slot Time Symbol Description and Settings Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set maximum specification for all devices For FVX110 set a value of 4 or greater V MID Minimum Inter Minimum value of PDU Delay communication data intervals Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set the maximum specification for all devices For FVX110 set a value of 4 or greater The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded The unit is Slot time set the value so that V MRD x V ST is the maximum value of the specification for all devices For FVX110 the setting must be a value of 12 or greater V FUN First Unpolled Indicate the address next Node to the address range used by the host Set 0 x 15 or greater Unused address range V MRD Maximum Reply Delay V NUN Number of consecutive Unpolled Node IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 5 Installation gt 5 5 0x00 Not used OxOF 0x10 Bridge device 0x13 0x14 LM device V FUN Unused V NUN V FUN V NUN BASIC device OxF7 OxF8 Default address OxFB OxFC Portable device address OxFF Note 1 Bridge device A linking device which brings data from one or more H1 networks Note 2 LM device with
29. to convert the output tracking value TRK VAL to non dimensional 38 8038 8138 TRK IN D Switch for output tracking See Section A5 12 for details 39 8039 8139 TRK VAL Output tracking value TRK VAL When MODE BLK actual LO the value scaled from the TRK VAL value is set in OUT 40 8040 8140 FF VAL Feedforward input value The FF VAL value is scaled to a value with the same scale as for OUT multiplied by the FF GAIN value and then added to the output of the PID computation 41 8041 8141 FF SCALE 100 1342 MAN Scale limits used for converting the FF VAL value to a non dimensional value 42 8042 8142 FF GAIN MAN Gain for FF VAL 43 8043 8143 UPDATE EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 44 8044 8144 BLOCK_ALM The block alarm is used for all configuration hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status if the subcode has changed IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 4 Index Inde
30. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUTO Notused by the FVX110 119 2119 TEST KEY3 AUTO Not used by the FVX110 120 2120 TEST 1 Not used by the FVX110 121 2121 TEST 2 Not used by the FVX110 122 2122 TEST 3 Not used by the FVX110 123 2123 TEST 4 Not used by the FVX110 124 2124 TEST 5 Not used by the FVX110 125 2125 TEST 6 Not used by the FVX110 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 13 General Specifications gt 1 3 1 13 General Specifications 13 4 Functional Specifications LCD Display f SEN 84 column x 32 lines full dot matrix with LED Functional specifications for Fieldbus backlight communication conform to the standard specifications H1 of Founpation fieldbus 3 lines indication as Top line Supply Voltage 14 alphanumerics indication of main description 9 to 32 V DC for general use flame proof type Main Tag such as PD TAG of field device Type n or nonincendive Scroll up to maximum 32 alphanumerics 9 to 24 V DC for intrinsically safe type Entity model Middle line 9 to 17 5 V DC for intrinsically safe type FISCO 5 digits process value including sign and unit model of 5digits x 2 lines Bottom line 14 alphanumerics of communication status and indicate description Sub Tag such as block information Bar graph Scroll bar Page information Scroll direction information Squawk Communication Requirements Supply Voltage 9 to 32 V DC Current consumption Steady condition 15 mA
31. 0 7 N m Shrouding Bolt F1001 ai Figure 10 1 Shrouding Bolts 10 2 1 Replacing the display A CAUTION Cautions for Flameproof Type Indicators Users are prohibited by law from modifying the construction of a flameproof type indicator This would invalidate the agency approval for the use of the indicator in a rated area It follows that the user is prohibited from using a flameproof type indicator with its display removed or from adding an display to a indicator If such modification is absolutely required contact Yokogawa This subsection describes the procedure for replacing an display See figure 10 2 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 10 Maintenance gt 1 0 2 A NOTE Long continuous use during high or low temperatures may reduce visibility Should this happen replace the indicator at the earliest opportunity A NOTE If two display actions below showed up it may be failure of Display Display repeat turning on and off Abnormal indication such as blackout If these two actions occurred please replace display with procedure written in this user s manual or contact Yokogawa m Removing the Display assembly 1 Remove the Display cover 2 While supporting the Display assembly with one hand loosen its two Mounting screws 3 Dismount the Display assembly from the CPU assembly When doing this carefully pull the Display assembly straight forward so as not to damage the connector pins between it
32. 0x03 Configuration Error Bad ConfErr Bad ConfErr L Bad ConfErr H Bad ConfErr C 9 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 Not Connected Bad NotCnnct Bad NotCnnct L Bad NotCnnct H Bad NotCnnct C 0x08 0x09 Ox0A 0x0B Bad DevFail Bad DevFail L Bad DevFail H Bad DevFail C Devige Fayre 0x0C Ox0D ONE OxOF Sensor Failure Bad SnsrFail Bad SnsrFail L Bad SnsrFail H Bad SnsrFail C 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 Bad NC LUV Bad NC LUV L Bad NC LUV H Bad NC LUV C No Comm with LastUsableValue 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 No Comm no LUV Bad NCnoLUV Bad NCnoLUV L Bad NCnoLUV H Bad NCnoLUV C NoComm withNoUsableValue 0x18 0x19 Ox1A Ox1B Bad OOS Bad OOSL Bad OOS H Bad OOS C Out of Senice Ox1C Ox1D Ox1E Ox1F e za Unc NonSpc Unc NonSpc L Unc NonSpc H Unc NonSpc C Uncertain Non specific 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 Last Usable Value Unc LUV Unc LUVL Unc LUV H Unc LUV C 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47 Substitute Manual Entry Unc S M_Entr Unc S M_EntrL Unc S M Entr H Unc S M Entr C SubstitudeValue 0x48 0x49 Ox4A Ox4B T Unc InitVal Unc InitVal L Unc InitVal H Unc InitVal C initial value Ox4C Ox4D Ox4E Ox4F Sensor Conversion not Accuraia Unc SnCnv_nA Unc SnCnv_nAL Unc SnCnv_nAH Unc SnCnv_nAC 0x50 0x51 0x52 0x53 TE Unc EURangeV Unc EURangeVL UncEURangeVH_ Unc EURangeV C Engineering Unit Range Violation 0x54 0x55 0x56 0x57 S b normal Unc SubNrml Unc SubNrml L Unc SubNrml H Unc SubNrml C Ke 0x58 0x59 Ox5A 0x5B G NC NonSpc G NC NonSpcL G NC NonSpc H G NC NonSpc C See EES 0x80 0x81 0x82 0x83 G NC
33. 1 INO6 40 41 2040 2041 INO7_CONNECTION INO8_CONNECTION 0 AUTO Use to specify what values of INO7 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 1 INO7 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO7 Use to specify what values of INO8 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_1 IN08 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 IN08 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 12 Parameter Lists gt 12 7 pty Index Parameter Name Factory Default Kp Explanation 42 2042 INO9 CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of INO9 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 2 INO1 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO1 43 2043 INTO CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN10 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_2 IN02 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO2 44 2044 IN11_CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN11 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_2 INO3 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO3 45 2045 INT2 CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN12 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 2 IN04 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO4 46 2046 INT3 CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN13 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_2 IN05 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 IN05 47 2047 IN14 CONNECTION 0
34. 1620 kft3 d d m V 1585 mV pH p H 1621 kCFH k CFH S 1586 uS cm d e m 1622 kCFM M h 1587 MQscm M e 1623 kCFS wp A m f t 1588 no units 1624 mft3 d d 1589 ml min mL ch 1625 mCFH m C FH 1590 Garg Bar 1626 mCFM m CF M m B a r 1591 mGarg g 1627 mCFS mceEs f t k b b I 1592 ft s2 log 1628 kbbl US Beer d UB d k b b II 1593 G s G sg 1629 kbbl US Beer h UB h m i c r k b b U 1594 microns hs 1630 kbbl US Beer min B mi n b b U 1595 mils mut ss 1631 bbl US Beer d Br d b b b U 1596 Ib in Prat 1632 bbl US Beer h Br h b b U B 1597 Bara B a r 1633 bbl US Beer min L swa b b U 1598 MSCFD MS CFD 1634 bbl US Beer s Br s MM S CF m b b I 1599 MMSCFD D 1635 mbbI US Beer d UB d M L B m b b I 1600 MLB H H 1636 mbbl US Beer h UB h n A m b b U 1601 nA ppm ppm 1637 mbbl US Beer min Bi med n m b b I 1602 mS m ms m 1638 mbbl US Beer s UB s u b b U 1603 uS m u S m 1639 UD US Beer min Bei tum ie cn k o h m b b 1604 kQecm secum 1640 ubbl US Beer s B d k b U 1605 I C ai Is Cc 1641 klb US d S H k b U 1606 pH C P c 1642 klb US h S k b US 1607 cm Fm m 1643 klb US min Toad d k b U 1608 mg L mg L 1644 klb US s S l M Mc e I 1609 Mmcells mL 1645 MI IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 18
35. 186 Oxba 8 PreambleExtension 2 0x2 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 0x1 10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 0 0x0 11 TimeSyncClass 4 0x4 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt A7 5 par Parameter Name Sub In ee Name R Deel Access Remarks 375 PLME_BASIC_ 0 R CHARACTERISTICS 1 ChannelStatisticsSupported 0x00 2 MediumAndDataRatesSupported 0x4900000000000000 3 lecVersion 1 0x1 4 NumOfChannels 1 0x1 5 PowerMode 0 0x0 376 CHANNEL STATES 0 R 1 channel 1 0 0x0 2 channel 2 128 0x80 3 channel 3 128 0x80 4 channel 4 128 0x80 5 channel 5 128 0x80 6 channel 6 128 0x80 7 channel 7 128 0x80 8 channel 8 128 0x80 377 PLME BASIC INFO 0 R 1 InterfaceMode 0 0x0 2 LoopBackMode 0 0x0 3 XmitEnabled 1 0x1 4 RcvEnabled 1 0x1 5 PreferredReceiveChannel 1 0x1 6 MediaTypeSelected 73 0x49 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x1 386 LINK SCHEDULE ACTIVATION VARIABLE 0 0x0 RW 387 LINK 0 R SCHEDULE HST 4NumofSchedules 2 0x2 CHARACTERISTICS RECORD 2NumOfSubSchedulesPerSchedule 5 0x5 3 ActiveScheduleVersion 0 4 ActiveSheduleOdIndex 0 5 ActiveScheduleStartingTime 0 388 DLME SCHEDULE 0 R DESCRIPTOR 1 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 389 DLME SCHEDULE 0 R DESCRIPTOR 2 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 390 DOMAIN 1 Rea
36. 250mA Pi 1 2W Ci 3 52nF Li 0uH F0213 ai MODEL Specified model code STYLE Style code SUFFIX Specified suffix code SUPPLY Supply voltage OUTPUT Output signal NO Serial number and year of production TOKYO 180 8750 JAPAN The manufacturer name and the address 2 1 The first digit in the final three numbers of the serial number appearing after NO on the name plate indicates the year of production The following is an example of a serial number for a product that was produced in 2010 91K819857 032 The year 2010 2 180 8750 is the Zip code for the following address 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo Japan 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 13 2 8 A IECEx Certification IECEx Flameproof Type Caution for IECEx flameproof type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code SF25 are applicable for use in hazardous locations No IECEx KEM10 0071 Applicable Standard IEC60079 0 2004 IEC60079 1 2003 Type of Protection and Marking Code Ex d IIC T6 Temperature Class T6 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Ambient Temperature for gas proof 50 to 75 C T6 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Note 2 Wiring n hazardous locations the cable entry devices shall be of a certified flameproof type suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable flameproof certified blanking element
37. 6 lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt A8 10 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to a field device immediately after changing parameter settings Data writing actions to the EEPROM are dual redandant to ensure reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setup the parameters may revert to the previous settings 1 DWNLD PROPERTY Sub Index Element Download Class Description Indicates the download class 1 Class 1 Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the ACTIVATE command 1 Write Response Returned Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the PREPARE command 1 Write Response Returned Reserved Reserved ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the PREPARE FOR DWNLD command to proceed to transition from DWNLD NOT READY to DWNLD READY Activation Delay Secs Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the ACTIVATE command to proceed to transition from DWNLD OK to DWNLD NOT READY 2 DOMAIN DESCRIPTOR Sub Index Element Command State Size Bytes Description Reads writes software download commands 1 PREPARE FOR DWNLD instruction of download preparation 2 ACTIVATE activation instruction 3 CANCEL DW
38. EN ee A2 8 List of Integrator Block Parameters eese A2 9 Input Selector IS Block eese A3 1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic A3 1 IE TTSplM A3 3 A3 2 1 Mode Handling ntn e ee e es A3 3 A322 MIN GOOD Handing rrr eere a aee A3 4 ig mee A3 5 A3 3 1 OP SELECT Handling esee nennen A3 5 A3 32 SELECTION Handling etre re e A3 6 Output Process Mg eege eseu eege A3 12 A3 4 1 Handling of SELECTED essere A3 12 A342 OUT PrOCeSSiNG 2e niet nine chine eins A3 13 A843 STATUS OPTS iae oe RR He RR dee A3 14 List of Input Selector Block Parameters sees A3 14 Application Example rrr nennt nnn nne an ien an rra Rne Rud A3 16 Arithmetic AR BIOGK 1 Ce CeEsteeee begeestert A4 1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic sees A4 1 Jop SET Toii o nc c ae ee Per ee A4 2 A4 2 1 DUEETRRINeUp aD A4 2 A422 Auxiliary Inputs ancien anata au ett cia A4 2 A42 3 INPUT OPTS iier nwa iawn vain wha wana ee RT A4 3 A4 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV A4 3 Computation Section iisicicicssccccis cate cctecresscicsetecctecrnadcvesetecstecevancteaectasterensaevecte A4 4 A4 3 1 Computing Equations A4 4 A43 2 Compensated Values
39. Enable This enables the external tracking function The value in TRK VAL will replace the value of OUT if TRK IN D becomes true and the target mode is not Man This enables TRK VAL to replace the value of OUT when the target mode is Man and TRK IN D is true The actual mode will then be LO Sets the value of PV in BKCAL OUT and RCAS OUT instead of the value of SP Puts the setpoint high low limits in Track in Manual Use PV for BKCAL OUT Obey SP limits if Cas or RCas force in the Cas or RCas mode No OUT limits in Disables the high low limits for Manual OUT in the Man mode A5 14 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan Initialization and manual fallback denotes a set of actions in which a PID block changes mode to IMan initialization and manual and suspends the control action Initialization and manual fallback takes place automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met The quality component of BKCAL_IN status is Bad OR The quality component of BKCAL_IN status is Good c AND The sub status component of BKCAL_IN status is FSA LO NI or IR The user cannot manually change the mode to IMan A mode transition to IMan occurs only when the condition above is met IM 01S01C01 01EN A5 15 Manual Fallback Manual fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode to Man and suspends the control action Manual fallback takes p
40. FS15 FISCO IIB Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH Entity Ui 24 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH Nonincendive for Class I Division 2 Groups A B C and D NIFW FNICO Class I Zone 2 Group IIC NIFW FNICO Class Il Division 2 Groups F amp G and Class III Division 1 Enclosure NEMA 4X Temp Class T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Nonincendive Apparatus Parameters Vmax 32 V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH CENELEC ATEX KEMA Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 EN 60079 1 EN 61241 0 EN 61241 1 Certificate KEMA 10ATEX0157 KF25 II 2G 2D Ex d IIC T6 Ex tD A21 IP6X T80 Degree of protection IP66 and IP67 Amb Temp Tamb for gas proof T6 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Max surface Temp for dust proof T80 C Tamb 40 to 167 F CENELEC ATEX DEKRA Intrinsically safe Approval CENELEC Certificate DEKRA 11ATEX0022 X ATEX Applicable standards EN 60079 0 EN 60079 11 EN 60079 26 EN 60079 27 EN 61241 11 Il 1G Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga Il 1D Ex ia IIIC T80 C Da IP6X Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F KS25 Max Surface Temp for dust proof T80 C Tamb 40 to 140 F Enclosure IP66 and IP67 FISCO OCH Ui217 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 pH FISCO IIB Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Entity Ui 24 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH CSA Explosionproof Approval Certificate 2325751 Applicable Standard C22 2 No 0
41. IN i with uncertain or bad status is internally interpreted as a good IN i The exception is that if the input status is Bad Not Connected INPUT OPTS does not apply and the input is considered bad as is A4 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV The value and PV status are determined by the statuses of two main inputs INPUT OPTS and RANGE LO and RANGE HI Ifthe statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See A4 2 1 Main Inputs If only one of two main inputs has good status after application of INPUT OPTS the PV value is determined as follows Ifthe status of IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE LO PV IN IN lt RANGE LO See M 2 1 Ifthe status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN LO is good IN LO lt RANGE HI PV IN LO IN LOZ RANGE H See A4 2 1 If the status of IN is good and that of IN LO is anything other than good PV g x IN I g x IN LO PV IN y y w RANGE LO If the status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN LO is good PV IN LO PV g x IN 1 g x IN LO IN LO RANGE HI FA0403 ai IM 01S01C01 01EN A4 3 Computation Section A4 3 1 Computing Equations This subsection shows computing equations used in the computation section 1 Flow compensation linear func PV xf f t 1 t 2 2 Flow
42. LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain 3 TimeResolution 2 Indicates the time resolution that is required to execute the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain 15 Domain Read write impossible get OD possible Carrying out the GenericDomainDownload command from a host writes an LAS schedule to Domain A CAUTION When downloading a LAS schedule to FVX110 maximum allowable linkages between devices are 25 A7 6 FAQs Q1 When the LAS stops an FVX110 does not back it up by becoming the LAS Why A1 1 Is that FVX110 running as an LM Check that the value of BootOperatFunctionalClass index 383 is 2 indicating that it is an LM A1 2 Check the values of V ST and V TN in all LMs on the segment and confirm that the following condition is met FVX110 V ST xV TN lt Other LMs V ST xV TN Q2 How can make an FVX110 become the LAS A2 1 Check that the version numbers of the active schedules in the current LAS and the FVX110 are the same by reading LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord index 387 for an FVX110 ActiveScheduleVersion subindex 3 A2 2 Make the FVX110 declare itself as and become the LAS by writing 0x00 false to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable in the current LAS and OxFF true to PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable index 380 in the FVX110 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt Q3 On a segment whe
43. Object has the parameters listed in Table 6 10 and 6 11 Purpose of View Objects is shown in Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Purpose of Each View Object Description VIEW 1 Setof dynamic parameters required by operator for plant operation PV SP OUT Mode etc VIEW 2 Set of static parameters which need to be shown to plant operator at once Range etc VIEW 3 Setof all the dynamic parameters VIEW 4 Set of static parameters for configuration or maintenance IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt Relative Parameter Mnemonic NEW Index 1 2 31 32 41 42 67 FD FAIL ACTIVE 4 4 68 FD OFFSPEC ACTIVE 4 4 69 FD MAINT ACTIVE 4 4 70 FD_CHECK_ACTIVE 4 4 71 FD_FAIL_MAP 4 72 FD_OFFSPEC_MAP 4 73 FD_MAINT_MAP 4 74 FD_CHECK_MAP 4 75 FD_FAIL_MASK 4 76 FD_OFFSPEC_MASK 4 TT FD MAINT MASK 4 78 FD CHECK MASK 4 79 FD_FAIL_ALM 80 FD_OFFSPEC_ALM 81 FD_MAINT_ALM 82 FD_CHECK_ALM 83 FD_FAIL_PRI 1 84 FD_OFFSPEC_PRI 1 85 FD_MAINT_PRI 1 86 FD_CHECK_PRI 1 87 FD_SIMULATE 9 88 FD_RECOMMEN_ACT 2 2 89 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 1 4 90 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 2 4 91 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 3 4 92 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 4 4 93 FD E
44. Other display setings 4 Pt aet Re at seve aie hae 7 7 7 3 7 Flow chart of indicator settings ssne 7 8 7 3 8 Units the auto link function allows you to display on the LCD 7 9 Explanation of Basic Items switching displays 8 1 8 1 Single Scroll MOMS ssa cue eee cane chee xed ned net eta dase EE ee 8 1 8 2 Continuous Scroll Mode scan MOE eene 8 2 8 3 Direction of Display Switching eere 8 2 In Process Operation leeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeee eene nennen nnn 9 1 9 1 Mode Transiti E 9 1 9 2 Generation of Alarim cccsccceseeceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeneanenes 9 1 9 2 1 leie eine gl E 9 1 9 2 2 Alarms and Events iin dn edes etd rene Fen e eva savant nx 9 1 IM 01S01C01 01EN 9 2 3 Standard categories for NAMUR NE 107 instrument diagnostics EE 9 2 9 3 Device Diagnostic Simulation Function eene 9 4 9 4 Write lock Write protect function esee 9 5 LUE Eo con o ett E 10 1 10 1 OVOIVIOW 10 1 10 2 Disassembly and Reassembly cccsecceseeeeseeeeseeeesneeeeeeeeeseeeeseeenseeensaeenes 10 1 10 2 1 Replacing the display sse 10 1 10 2 2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly ss
45. PV SCALE O S 100 11 substituted into OUT in Auto mode H 0 Indicates PV scaling for making a memo 1342 Output scaling for the host for making a memo 1 11 17511 17611 OUT 100 11 RANGE 0 1342 1 12 17512 17612 GRANT 0 2 The parameter used to check if various operations DENY have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of them are executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been set If no bit has been set itis evident that the operations have been executed successfully IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 7 Relative Index Index Parameter Write Valid Initial View Bescrindan i Remarks Index AR1 AR2 Mode Range Value 1 2 3 4 P 13 17513 17613 INPUT_ Determines whether an input is used as a good OPTS input when the input status is bad or uncertain Function Handles IN as good input if its status is uncertain Handles IN LO as good input if its status is uncertain Handles IN 1 as good input if its status is uncertain Handles IN 1 as good input if its status is bad Handles IN 2 as good input if its status is uncertain Handles IN 2 as good input if its status is bad Handles IN 3 as good input if its status is uncertain Handles IN 3 as g
46. SELECTION IN 1 M Man IN 2 gt MODE First Good IN 3 9 gt OUT IN 4 y Auto IN 5 IN 6 p MINIMUM gt SELECTED IN_7 IN 8 ISABLE 1 R M D MAXIMUM Configuration DISABLE 2 M DISABLE 3 M STATUS OPTS DISABLE 4 gt MIDDLE DISABLE_5 gt SELECT_TYPE DISABLE_6 DISABLE_7 gt DISABLE_8 gt AVERAGE OP_SELECT gt FA0301 ai Figure A3 1 S Block Input Parameters Input Terms IN 1 Block input 1 IN 2 Block input 2 IN 3 Block input 3 IN 4 Block input 4 IN 5 Block input 5 IN 6 Block input 6 IN 7 Block input 7 IN 8 Block input 8 DISABLE 1 Selector switch 1 to disable input 1 from being selected DISABLE 2 Selector switch 2 to disable input 2 from being selected DISABLE 3 Selector switch 3 to disable input 3 from being selected DISABLE A Selector switch 4 to disable input 4 from being selected DISABLE 5 Selector switch 5 to disable input 5 from being selected DISABLE 6 Selector switch 6 to disable input 6 from being selected DISABLE 7 Selector switch 7 to disable input 7 from being selected DISABLE 8 Selector switch 8 to disable input 8 from being selected OP SELECT A parameter which can be set by an operator to forcibly employ the input of the selected number IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 2 Output Parameters Computation or Selection Results OUT Block outpu
47. Use to specify what values of IN14 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_2 INO6 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO6 48 2048 IN15 CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN15 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 2 INO7 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 INO7 49 2049 INT amp CONNECTION 0 Use to specify what values of IN16 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_2 IN08 2 Connected to ISEL FB 2 IN08 50 2050 IN 01 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 1 Value 0 0 51 2051 IN 02 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 2 Value 99999 0 52 2052 IN 03 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 3 Value 0 0 53 2053 IN 04 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 4 Value 99999 0 54 2054 IN 05 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 5 Value 0 0 55 2055 IN 06 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 6 Value 99999 0 56 2056 IN 07 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 7 Value 0 0 57 2057 N 08 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 8 Value 99999 0 58 2058 IN 09 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 9 Value 0 0 59 2059 IN 10 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 10 Value 99999 0 60 2060 IN 11 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 11 Value 0 0 61 2061 IN 12 Status OxCO Indicates process
48. also defined as lower quality When DISABLE nis ON the value of IN n becomes invalid For the priority of DISABLE n is higher than that of IN n Status in SELECT TYPE except OP SELECT QUALITY of DISABLE IN Status IN Good NC Valid Good C Valid Uncertain Valid Uncertain Invalid Bad Invalid Condition The number of inputs that are good is greater than the value of MN GOOD 3 Priority of IN n when the same value is input Priority Input 1 Highest 8 Lowest IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8 co o O1 lo j N 4 Refer to A3 2 2 for the details of MIN GOOD IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 4 A3 2 2 MIN GOOD Handling If there is no selectable input or if the number of selectable inputs is less than the value of MIN GOOD SELECTED becomes 0 A case where the number of valid INs is less than the value of MIN GOOD IN 1 23 IN 22345 EI IN 3 45 IN 4 2 34 IN 5 23 6 IN 67 15 5 IN 7 32 5 IN 8 274 DISABLE 1 ON DISABLE 2 ON DISABLE 3 OFF DISABLE 4 ON DISABLE 5 OFF DISABLE 6 ON DISABLE 7 ON DISABLE 8 ON OP SELECT 1 SELECTION SELECT TYPE Middle STATUS OPTS MIN GOOD 3 Figure A3 2 Example 1 OUT
49. an even number of valid inputs SELECTION IN 1 23 IN 22345 O gt C OUT 19 55 IN 345 O IN_5 IN_6 2 19 55 IN 4 2 34 IN 522326 O gt C SELECTED 0 IN 62155 ODO IN 7 32 5 IN 8 274 SELECT TYPE Middle DISABLE 1 ON gt STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 ON p MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 OFF DISABLE_4 OFF _ R DISABLE 5 OFF X DISABLE 6 OFF DISABLE_7 ON DISABLE_8 ON OP_SELECT 0 gt gt FA0307 ai Figure A3 7 Example 6 Because DISABLE_1 DISABLE_2 DISABLE_7 and DISABLE_8 are ON the corresponding IN_1 IN_2 IN_7 and IN_8 are disabled and the remaining four INs are enabled Furthermore because IN_3 has the maximum value and IN_4 has the minimum value among the valid INs they are not selected and the average of IN_5 and IN_6 inputs is output When the average is selected for OUT SELECTED is set to 0 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 1 0 If there is an odd number of valid inputs SELECTION IN 12228 EI gt oe i gt OUT 23 6 IN 3245 EI IN42234 O gt oe gt SELECTED 5 IN 62155 O IN 72325 O Mc Xl i K
50. and GOOD LIM The Integrator block determines the status of the output using the three parameters PCT_INCL UNCERT LIM and GOOD LIM e PCT INCL2 GOOD LIM gt Good e UNCERT LIM x PCT INCL GOOD LIM gt Uncertain e PCT INCL UNCERT LIM gt Bad IfINTEG TYPE is 5 6 or 7 the status of the trip output becomes Good NS Constant A2 5 2 Determining the Output Value The value of OUT Value is determined as follows e For counting up OUT integration start value 0 Total e For counting down OUT integration start value TOTAL SP Total Total Total of integrated values This value is retained even if INTEG TYPE is changed during integration in AUTO If OUT is rewritten in the MAN mode integration starts with the value rewritten in MAN mode after the mode was returned to AUTO The values in OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP are determined according to the correlation between OUT and TOTAL SP PRE TRIP For counting up PRE TRIP 431 OUT TRIP 14 0 OUT_TRIP 14 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT_PTRIP 15 0 TOTAL_SP 7 Counting up starting from 0 For counting down OUT TRIP 14 1 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT PTRIP 15 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT_PTRIP 15 0 lt _________ gt o PRE_TRIP 31 TOTAL_SP 7 FA0205 ai Counting down starting from TOTAL SP IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator
51. and the CPU assembly m Attaching the Display assembly 1 Align both the Display assembly and CPU assembly connectors and engage them 2 Insert and tighten the two Mounting screws 3 Replace the Display cover CPU assembly Display Boss assembly scroll knob Output terminal i screw pin Display Cover pr Figure 10 2 Removing and Display Assembly and CPU Assembly F1002 ai 10 2 2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly This subsection describes the procedure for replacing the CPU assembly See figure 10 2 m Removing the CPU Assembly 1 Remove the Display cover 2 Turn the Scroll knob screw to the position where the screw head slot is horizontal as shown in figure 10 2 3 Disconnect the Output terminal cable cable with brown connector at the end When doing this lightly press the side of the CPU assembly connector and pull the cable connector to disengage 4 Use a socket driver width across flats 5 5mm to loosen the two bosses 5 Carefully pull the CPU assembly straight forward to remove it A NOTE Be careful not to apply excessive force to the CPU assembly when removing it m Mounting the CPU Assembly 1 Connectthe output terminal cable with brown connector AA NOTE Make certain that the cables do not get pinched between the case and the edge of the CPU assembly 2 Align and engage the scroll knob screw pin with the groove on the bracket on the CPU assemb
52. bus control function Link Master function Note 3 BASIC device without bus control function F0508 ai Figure 5 8 Available Address Range 5 7 Bus PowerON Turn on the power of the host and the bus After displaying the startup screen shown in Figure 5 9 the regular screen display appears If the indicator is not lit check the polarity of the power supply F0509 ai Figure 5 9 Using the host device display function check that the FVX110 is in operation on the bus The device information including PD tag Node address and Device ID is described on the sheet attached to the FVX110 The device information is given in duplicate on this sheet DEVICE INFORMATION Device ID H 5945430010XXXXXXXX PD Tag i UT1001 Device Revision S 3 Node Address Oxf3 Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location Note Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http www yokogawa com fid English or http www yokogawa co jp Sensor fieldbus fieldbus htm Japanese DEVICE INFORMATION Device ID 4 5945430010XXXXXXXX PD Tag UT1001 Device Revision 3 Node Address Oxf3 Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location Note Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http www yokogawa com fid English or http www yokogawa co jp Sensor fieldbus fieldbus htm Japanese F0510 ai Figure 5 10 Device Information Sheet Atta
53. contains sensitive parts that can be damaged by static electricity Take precautions such as using a grounded wrist strap when handling electronic parts or touching the board circuit patterns Also be sure to place the removed CPU assembly into a bag with an antistatic coating 10 2 Disassembly and Reassembly This section describes procedures for disassembly and reassembly for maintenance and component replacement Always turn OFF power and shut off and release pressures before disassembly Use proper tools for all operations Table 10 1 shows the tools required Table 10 1 Tools for Disassembly and Reassembly Tool Quantity Remarks Phillips 1 JIS B4633 No 2 screwdriver Slotted 1 screwdriver Allen wrenches 3 JIS B4648 One each nominal 3 4 and 2 5 mm Allen wrenches Socket driver 1 Width across flats 5 5 mm Tweezers 1 A CAUTION Precautions for ATEX Flameproof Type Indicators Flameproof type indicators must be as a rule removed to a non hazardous area for maintenance and be disassembled and reassembled to the original state On the flameproof type indicators the two covers are locked each by an Allen head bolt shrouding bolt When a shrouding bolt is driven clockwise by an Allen wrench it is going in and cover lock is released and then the cover can be opened When a cover is closed it should be locked by a shrouding bolt without fail Tighten the shrouding bolt to a torque of
54. gt A8 5 A8 9 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download Table A8 5 System Network Management VFD Parameters Write Mode R W read write R read only SV Name index _Sub Parameter Name Factory Set Mode Remarks 400 DWNLD 0 R PROPERTY 1 Download Class 1 2 Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE 1 3 Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE 1 4 Reserved 0 5 ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs 300 6 Activation Delay Secs 60 410 DOMAIN_ 0 R W Read write permitted DESCRIPTOR only for sub index 1 1 Command 3 2 State 1 3 Error Code 0 4 Download Domain Index 440 5 Download Domain Header Index 420 6 Activated Domain Header Index 430 7 Domain Name Device name 420 DOMAIN_ 0 HEADER 1 1 Header Version Number 0 2 Header Size 0 3 Manufacturer ID 4 _ Device Family 5 Device Type 6 Device Revision 0 7 DD Revision 0 8 Software Revision 9 Software Name 10 Domain Name 430 DOMAIN_ 0 HEADER 2 1 Header Version Number 1 2 Header Size 44 3 Manufacturer ID 0x594543 4 Device Family DEV TYPE of RB 5 Device Type DEV TYPE of RB 6 Device Revision DEV REV of RB 7 DD Revision DD REV of RB 8 Software Revision SOFT REV of RB 9 Software Name ORIGINAL 10 Domain Name Device name 440 DOMAIN Read write prohibited Get OD permitted IM 01S01C01 01EN A8
55. has occurred between the set value and measured value The alarm was caused either by the instrument or process state M Maintenance An alarm category for a detected failure that has a low level of urgency but is a failure that could develop into a problem causing restrictions in instrument functionality in some environments Alarms displayed by DEVICE STATUS 1 to DEVICE STATUS 3 resource block parameters in their default setting are categorized as described in NAMUR NE 107 Alarm Categories in the DEVICE STATUS table in section 11 1 When an alarm occurs a character string that corresponds to an alarm category is assigned to FD ACTIVE index 1067 to 1070 indicates FAIL OFF SPEC MAINT or CHECK For example an F category alarm is assigned to FD FAIL ACTIVE Similarly procedures for processing alarms are assigned to FD RECOMMEN ACT For details on alarm displays and how to deal with them refer to Table 9 2 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 9 In Process Operation gt Table 9 2 Field Diagnostic Alert Indication of FD ACTIVE Electronics failure Indication of FD RECOMMEN ACT Repair electronics Solution Replace electrical parts e g amplifier Or contact sales office or service center Sensor Actuator failure Potential failure Repair Sensor Actuator Investigate failure Replace mechanics e g sensor or actuator Or contact sales office or service center Perform reconfiguration cleaning wirin
56. i BIAS IN i x GAIN IN i The bias parameter is used for calculating absolute temperature or absolute pressure while the gain parameter is used for normalization of square root extraction IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 3 A4 2 3 INPUT OPTS INPUT OPTS has an option that handles an input with uncertain or bad status as a good status input Bit Function 0 Handles IN as a good status input if its status is uncertain 1 Handles IN LO as a good status input if its status is uncertain 2 Handles IN 1 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 3 Handles IN 1 as a good status input if its status is bad 4 Handles IN 2 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 5 Handles IN 2 as a good status input if its status is bad 6 Handles IN 3 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 7 Handles IN 3 as a good status input if its status is bad 8to 15 Reserved There are options called IN Use uncertain and IN LO Use uncertain for the IN and IN LO inputs When these options are valid IN and IN LO are internally interpreted as good IN and IN LO even if their statuses are uncertain There is no option for bad status For the IN 1 IN 2 and IN 3 auxiliary inputs there are options known as IN i Use uncertain and IN i Use bad If these options are valid an
57. information for input 12 Value 99999 0 62 2062 IN 13 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 13 Value 0 0 63 2063 IN 14 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 14 Value 99999 0 64 2064 IN 15 Status 0xCO Indicates process information for input 15 Value 0 0 IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 8 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt pity Index Parameter Name Factory Default us Explanation 65 2065 IN 16 Status OxCO Indicates process information for input 16 Value 99999 0 66 2066 INO1 MAIN TAG PD Tag01 Use to set the Main Tag for input 1 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 67 2067 INO1 SUB TAG BLKO1 0UT Use the Sub Tag for input 1 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 68 2068 INO1 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 1 1000 2 69 2069 INO2 MAIN TAG ABCDEFGHIJKL Use to set the Main Tag for input 2 Use as a memo field and MNOPQRSTUV set the information you most want to display in order to inden WXYZabcdef tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup exampl
58. information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 110 2110 IN15 SCALE 100 0 AUTO Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 15 1000 2 111 2111 IN16 MAIN TAG PD Tag16 AUTO Use to set the Main Tag for input 16 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to indentify instruments See PD_TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 12 Parameter Lists gt 12 11 Relative Write gt index Index Parameter Name Factory Default Mode Explanation 112 2112 IN16 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 16 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 113 2113 INT SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 16 1000 2 114 2114 MS CODE Null AUTO Records and displays instrument MS codes 115 2115 SERIAL NO Null AUTO Records and displays instrument serial numbers 116 2116 MANUFAC DATE Null AUTO Records and displays manufacture dates for instruments 117 2117 TEST KEY1 0 0 AUTO Notused by the FVX110 118 2118 TEST KEY2 0
59. is 0 Aute IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 14 A3 4 3 STATUS OPTS Bit Description Use Uncertain as Good Causes all inputs OP SELECT IN n and DISABLE n the status of which is uncertain to be handled as good NC status inputs and the others to be handled as bad status inputs Uncertain if Man mode When the mode is Man the status of OUT is interpreted as uncertain This does not apply to SELECTED A3 5 List of Input Selector Block Parameters jas ja pos Parameter ite Valid Range ae 1 T 4 Description Remarks 0 17000 17100 BLOCK_ Block TAG IS Information relating to this function block HEADER Tag O S such as block tag DD revision and execution time 1 17001 17101 ST REV 2 2 2 2 Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the IS block If a setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 17002 17102 TAG DESC Null A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 17003 17103 STRATEGY 1 2 A universal parameter intended for use by the high level system to identify function blocks 4 17004 17104 ALERT 1 255 1 1 Key information used to identify the location KEY where an alert has occurred Generally this parameter is used by the high level
60. is Not Connected Note that the main inputs may be accepted if IN or IN LO is not in Not Connected sub status In this case the number of inputs that are not in Not Connected sub status is regarded as N A4 4 Output Section After executing the computing equation the block applies a gain to the calculated result and then adds a bias to it It then substitutes the result into PRE_OUT and if the mode is in AUTO the value of PRE_OUT is taken as OUT PRE OUT func x gain bias where func result of computing equation execution OUT PRE OUT when the mode is in AUTO Next the block performs limitation processing OUT HI UM OUT LOW LML This processing is described as follows with respect to the value of PRE OUT If PRE OUT OUT HI LIM PRE OUT OUT HI UM The high limited processing is applied to the status of PRE OUT If PRE OUT OUT LO LIM PRE OUT OUT LO LIM The low limited processing is applied to the status of PRE OUT IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 5 A4 4 1 Mode Handling Mode Output Auto OUT PRE OUT MAN For OUT the OUT value in the Auto mode just O S before change to MAN or O S is retained In the Manual mode including O S the value of OUT in the Auto mode just before a change to the Manual mode is held or the value written to OUT is output If the mode is switched from Manual to Auto the value of OUT that is linear
61. kW m2 ZC gr 1411 Sv S v Ww 1376 mW m2 i om 2 1412 mSv ms y u W 1377 uW m2 m 1413 rem tE m W 1378 pW m2 2 1414 C kg C kg P a s m C 1379 Pass m3 m 1415 mC kg kg N S 1380 Nes m m 1416 R R P a s 17 J 1381 Pass m m 1417 1 J m3 a om 3 e V 1382 B B 1418 e V m3 cdm 1383 dB d B 1419 m3 C m C 1384 mol mig l 1420 Vik V1 K SEH kmol k m o d 1421 mV K m V4 K 1386 mmol mom od 1422 pH p H 1387 umol i omm oe i 1423 ppm ppm k 1388 kgmol a 4 1424 ppb pp b 1389 g mol S a i 1425 ppt p pt m d e 1390 m3 mol i om ow 1426 degBrix Br m i d mz d e g 1391 d3 mol J mood 1427 degBall Bal i c m 3 p r o o f 1392 cm3 mol fm 3 1428 proof vol og d L p i o 0 f 1393 L mol E ime 1429 proof mass pcc p IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 15 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 4 b MI m p 430 Ib Igal I Ga I 1466 MImpGal s Gal s k c a u G a 1431 kcal s los 1467 ylGal min wm an k c a m G a I 1432 kcal min Imi n 1468 mlGal min ic m 4 k c a k Ga 1433 kcal h h 1469 kIGal min E sm k c a M I Ga I 1434 kcal d I d 1470 MIGal min Lo mi m M c a u m p 1435 Mcal s T ve 1471 ylmpGal h Gail f h M c a m m p 1436
62. m 1465 klmpGal s LEE W fe 1501 km3 min t mi i IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 16 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 1502 Mm3 min ti i n 1538 L min 20 C 1atm d J 1503 um3 h nM h 1539 L h 20 C 1atm r Sa 1504 mm3 h dii h 1540 L d 20 C 1atm Sd 1505 km3 h SR h 1541 Paa P aa 1506 Mm3 h mom h 1542 Pag Pag 1507 um3 d ai f d 1543 Gpaa PE a a 1508 mm3 d ur d 1544 Gpag G Pag 1509 km3 d em d 1545 Mpaa M Paa 1510 Mm3 d Mm d 1546 Mpag MPag 1511 cm3 s TM f s 1547 kPaa KP a a 1512 cm3 min i m n 1548 kPag k Pag 1513 cm3 h m m h 1549 mPaa mes 1514 cm3 d Er M d 1550 mPag mPag 1515 kcal kg g S S bel yPaa u P aa 1516 Bil S l i b 1552 yPag u Pag 1517 kL k L 1553 hPaa Hh paa 1518 kL min a on 1554 hPag h Pag 1519 kL h k Lb F h 1555 g cm3a E A DET 1520 kL d kb d 1556 g cm2a K 2 g 1521 m3 0 C 1atm m N 1557 kg cm2a id d a 1522 m3 s 0 C 1atm 4 b 3 1558 kg cm2g g 1523 m3 min 0 C 1atm 2 1559 inH20a Eo de S S 1524 m3 h 0 C 1atm e 1560 inH20g E E f 9 1525 m3 d 0 C 1atm j CEN 1561 inH20a 4 C A s i 1526 m3 20 C 1atm m S 1562 inH2Og 4 C d S i 1527 m3 s 20 C 1atm V BP
63. n m in a francouz tin Po adujete li pokyny t kaj c se v robk s nev bu n m schv len m ve va em lok ln m jazyku kancel Yokogawa Visos gamini ATEX Ex kategorijos Eksploatavimo instrukcijos teikiami angle vokie ig ir pranc z kalbomis Nor dami gauti prietais Ex dokumentacij kitomis kalbomis susisiekite su artimiausiu bendrov s Yokogawa biuru arba atstovu Visas ATEX Ex kategorijas izstradajumu Lieto anas instrukcijas tiek pieg d tas angiu vacu un fran u valodas Ja v laties sa emt Ex ieri u dokumentaciju cit valoda Jums ir jasazinas ar firmas Jokogava Yokogawa tuvako ofisu vai parstavi K ik ATEX Ex toodete kasutamisjuhendid on esitatud inglise saksa ja prantsuse keeles Ex seadmete muukeelse dokumentatsiooni saamiseks p rduge lahima lokagava Yokogawa kontori v i esindaja poole Wszystkie instrukcje obs ugi dla urz dze w wykonaniu przeciwwybuchowym Ex zgodnych z wymaganiami ATEX dost pne s w j zyku angielskim niemieckim i francuskim Je eli wymagana jest instrukcja obstugi w Pa stwa lokalnym je zyku prosimy o kontakt z najbli szym biurem Yokogawy Vsi predpisi in navodila za ATEX Ex sorodni pridelki so pri roki v angliS ini nemS ini ter franco amp ini Ee so Ex sorodna navodila potrebna v va em tukejnjem jeziku kontaktirajte va najbli i Yokogawa office ili predstaunika Az ATEX Ex m szerek g pk nyveit angol n met s francia nyelv
64. of explosion proof instruments should refer first to section 2 8 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument of this manual The use of this instrument is restricted to those who have received appropriate training in the device Take care not to create sparks when accessing the instrument or peripheral devices in a hazardous location Modification Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage resulting from any modification made to this instrument by the customer 1 2 Warranty The warranty shall cover the period noted on the quotation presented to the purchaser at the time of purchase Problems occurring during the warranty period shall basically be repaired free of charge If any problems are experienced with this instrument the customer should contact the Yokogawa representative from which this instrument was purchased or the nearest Yokogawa Office If a problem arises with this instrument please inform us of the nature of the problem and the circumstances under which it developed including the model specification and serial number Any diagrams data and other information you can include in your communication will also be helpful The party responsible for the cost of fixing the problem shall be determined by Yokogawa following an investigation conducted by Yokogawa The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for repair costs even during the warranty period if the malfunction is due to
65. parameter setup procedures For information on function blocks as well as the LM function and software download functions refer to Appendix 1 to 8 7 2 Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process AA IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power immediately after making a setting When data is saved to the EEPROM redundant processing is performed to enhance reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after making a setting the modified parameters are not saved and ma return to their original values Operating mode Many parameters require a change of operating mode of the function block to O S Out of Service to rewrite parameter data To change the operating mode of the function block its MODE_BLK needs to be changed The MODE_BLK is comprised of the four sub parameters below 1 Target target mode Parameter to set the operating mode of the block 2 Actual Actual mode Parameter to indicate the current operating mode of the block 3 Permit Permitted mode Parameter to indicate operating mode that the block is allowed to take 4 Normal Normal mode Parameter to indicate the operating mode the block will usually take 7 3 LCD Transducer Block 7 3 4 Function Outline The LCD transducer block controls the indications displayed on the LCD FVX110 displays process variables from field instruments which have received in MAO or IS function block and also simulation input 7 3 2 Operat
66. parameter that represents block operating condi tion It comprises the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 2006 BLOCK_ERR Indicates error status of the PID block The FVX110 trans ducer block handles the following factors Bit 0 An XD_ERROR has occurred Bit 15 Target mode is O S 2007 UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information if an event update occurs 2008 BLOCK_ALM Indicates error information if an error occurs in a block 2009 TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY Parameter for storing indexes of FVX110 transducers 2010 TRANSDUCER_TYPE Indicates FVX110 types Indicates 65535 other for the FVX110 2011 XD_ERROR Stores the most serious errors that occur in the transducer block 0 No error 50 Reset performed 100 LCD error 12 2012 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY Stores the DD item ID for the first index of important param eters in the LCD transducer block 13 2013 NOW_DISPLAYING Indicates the number that the input currently displayed on the LCD occupies among valid inputs of information 14 2014 DISP_TARGET_FORCE A parameter for identifying information of valid inputs that you want to view 0 Scroll knob is active No 01 in valid connection No 02 in valid connection No 03 in valid connection No 04 in valid connection No 05 in valid connection No 06 in valid connection No 07 in valid connection No 08 in valid connection No 09 in v
67. s software it generally take about 20 minutes where there is a one to one connection between a fieldbus device and download tool and longer when multiple field devices are connected to the fieldbus Start download tool v Select the software file s you Select file s want to download y7 Select the device s to which you Select device s want to download software y Carry out download Transmit the software to the field device s v Activate device s Activate the device s to start with new software FA0802 ai Figure A8 2 Flow of Software Download Procedure A CAUTION Carrying out a software download leaves the PD tag node address and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device but may reset other parameters to the defaults except a minor update that does not change the number of parameters Hence where necessary save the parameters using an engineering tool parameter setting utility or the like before carrying out a software download and then reconfigure the field device s after the download For details see Section A8 6 A CAUTION The current dissipation of the target field device increases transitorily immediately after a download due to erasing of the FlashROM s contents Use a fieldbus power supply which has sufficient capacity to cover such increases in feed current A ca
68. system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only This is one of the universal parameters 5 17005 17105 MODE BLK 4 4 A universal parameter representing the operation status of the IS block It consists of the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 6 17006 17106 BLOCK 2 2 Indicates the error status relating to the ERR Input Selector function block The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 15 O S mode 7 17007 17107 OUT MAN 0 5 5 Block output 8 17008 17108 OUT 100 11 Set the range of OUT RANGE 0 1342 1 9 17009 17109 GRANT 0 2 The parameter used to check if various DENY operations have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of them are executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been set If no bit is set itis evident that the operations have been executed successfully 10 17010 17110 STATUS O S Use Uncertain 0 2 Auser selectable option available for status OPTS as good and handling in the block Uncertain if Manual only 11 17011 17111 IN 1 0 5 5 Input 1 12 17012 17112 IN 2 0 5 5 Input 2 13 17013 17113 IN 3 0 5 5 Input 3 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3
69. the PID control computation Man Manual mode in which the PID block outputs the value set by the user manually LO The PID block outputs the value set in TRK_ VAL IMan _ Initialization and manual mode in which the control action is suspended The PID block enters this mode when the specified condition is met see Section A5 14 O S Out of service mode in which neither the control computation nor action is carried out and the output is kept at the value that was output before the PID block entered into O S mode A5 9 1 Mode Transitions Transition Destination Condition NOT Conditions Mode O S 1 If O S is set in MODE BLK target or if O S is set in target inside the resource block IMan 2 If the specified condition is NOT if met see Section A5 14 condition 1 is met LO 3 If Track Enable is specified NOT if either in CONTROL OPTSand or both of the value of TRK IN D conditions 1 is true and 2 are met Man 4 If Man is set in MODE NOT if any BLK target or if IN status one or more of input status is Bad conditions 1 to 3 are met Auto 5 If Auto is set in MODE NOT if any BLK target one or more of AND conditions 1 to if IN status input status is 3 are met not Bad Cas 6 If Cas is set in MODE NOT if any BLK target one or more of AND conditions 1 to if neither IN status input 3 are met status nor CAS IN status is Bad IM 01S
70. the indicator mounting hardware will not be included After checking the indicator carefully repack it in its box and keep it there until you are ready to install it U bolt nut L Mounting bracket U bolt S U bolt L F0201 ai Figure 2 1 Indicator Mounting Hardware 2 1 Model and Specifications Check The model name and specifications are written on the name plate attached to the case SEGMENT INDICATOR F0202 ai Figure 2 2 Name Plate 2 2 Unpacking Keep the indicator in its original packaging to prevent it from being damaged during shipment Do not unpack the indicator until it reaches the installation site 2 3 Storage The following precautions must be observed when storing the instrument especially for a long period a Select a storage area which meets the following conditions e Itis not exposed to rain or subject to water seepage leaks Vibration and shock are kept to a minimum thas an ambient temperature and relative humidity within the following ranges Storage ambient temperature 30 to 80 C Relative humidity 0 to 100 R H Preferred temperature and humidity approx 25 C and 6596 R H b When storing the indicator repack it carefully in the packaging that it was originally shipped with 2 4 Selecting the Installation Location The indicator is designed to withstand severe environmental conditions However to ensure that it will provide years of stab
71. the version number of an LAS schedule which has already been downloaded to the domain to this parameter causes the corresponding schedule to be executed On the other hand writing O to this parameter stops execution of the active schedule 13 LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord a Element hie Description 1 NumOf 1 Indicates the total number Schedules of LAS schedules that have been downloaded to the domain 2 NumOfSub 1 Indicates the maximum SchedulesPer number of sub schedules an Schedule LAS schedule can contain This is fixed to 1 in the Yokogawa communication stacks 3 lActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the version number Version ofthe schedule currently executed 4 ActiveSchedule 2 OdIndex Indicates the index number of the domain that stores the schedule currently executed 5 ActiveSchedule 6 StaringTime Indicates the time when the current schedule began being executed 14 DiImeScheduleDescriptor This parameter exists for the same number as the total number of domains and each describes the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain For the domain to which a schedule has not yet been downloaded the values in this parameter are all zeros Sub Size su index Element bytes Description 1 Version 2 Indicates the version number of the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain 2 Macrocycle 4 Indicates the macro cycle Duration ofthe
72. to transducer block Provides a function for automatic selection of one signal from multiple input signals using a specified method of selection 8 AR function block Applies gain multiplication and bias addition to the calculated result through use of multiple computing equations to perform limitation processing for output IM 01S01C01 01EN 4 About Fieldbus gt 4 2 4 3 Logical Structure of Each 4 4 Wiring System Configuration Block The number of devices that can be connected to EXE a single bus and the cable length vary depending System network management VFD on system design When constructing systems PD Tag both the basic and overall design must be carefully parameters Node address considered to achieve optimal performance Function block execution schedule Link Master Function block VFD PID Function block x2 AR Function block x2 IT Function block SC Function block MAO or IS LCD Transducer Function block block LCD Block tag Block tag Parameters Parameters IN 1 IN 2 IN 8 MAO or IS Function block Block tag Parameters IN 1 IN 2 External input Max 16 input IN 8 Resource block Block tag Parameters F0401 ai Figure 4 1 Logical Structure of Each Block Setting of various parameters node addresses and PD Tags shown in Figure 3 1 is required before starting ope
73. to 60 C Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Intrinsically safe ratings Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Entity Ui 24 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH FISCO IIC Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH FISCO IIB Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Intrinsically safe ratings Ex ic IIC T4 Ui 32 V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH 1 Applicable for Electrical connection code 2 4 7 9 C and D 13 5 Optional Specifications SS25 Item Description Optional code Painting Color change Amplifier cover only P Amplifier cover and terminal cover Munsell 7 5 R4 14 PR Coating change Anti corrosion coating 2 x2 316 SST exterior parts 316 SST name plate tag plate and screw HC Lightning protector Power supply voltage 10 5 to 32 V DC 10 5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe type 9 to 32 V DC for Fieldbus communication type A Allowable current Max 6000A 1x40us Repeating 1000A 1x40us 100times Wired tag plate 304 SST tag plate wired onto indicator 316 SST when HC is specified N4 1 Not applicable for amplifier housing code 2 2 Not applicable with color change option 3 316 SST or 316L SST The specification is included in amplifier housing code 2 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 13 General Specifications gt 1 3 5 13 6 Dimensions 95 3 74 Unit mm approx inch
74. to properly start Fieldbus itis recommended that the devices used satisfy the requirements of the above test Host Used for accessing field devices A minimum of one device with the bus control function is needed Cable Used for connecting devices Refer to Fieldbus Technical Information for details of instrumentation cabling Provide a cable sufficiently long to connect all devices For field branch cabling use terminal boards or a connection box as required First check the capacity of the power supply The power supply capacity must be greater than the sum of the maximum current consumed by all devices to be connected to Fieldbus The maximum current consumed power supply voltage 9 V to 32 V for the FVX110 is 15 mA 24 mA in Software download operation The cable used for the spur must be of the minimum possible length IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 2 6 2 Network Definition Before connection of devices with Fieldbus define the Fieldbus network Allocate PD Tag and node addresses to all devices excluding such passive devices as terminators The PD Tag is the same as the conventional one used for the device Up to 32 alphanumeric characters may be used for definition Use a hyphen as a delimiter as required The node address is used to specify devices for communication purposes Because this data is too long for a PD Tag the host uses the node address in place of the PD Tag for commu
75. to start as an LM IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 7 7 CurrentLinkSettingRecord and 9 PlmeBasicCharacteristics ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord Sub Size m es ind Element Value Description CurrentLinkSettingRecord indicates the meer bytes bus parameter settings currently used 1 E 1 8 Moin Se are An atistics not supported ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord indicates the Supported bus parameter settings to be used when the 2 Medium 8 10x49 00 00 00 Wire medium device becomes the LAS Thus when a device AndData 00000000 voltage mode and is the LAS its CurrentLinkSettingRecord and Nous Hed 31 25 SC are ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord have the same ERN e Se 2 i 3 lecVersion 2 1 Version of IEC values physical Layer P Entity Sub Size Descrip index Element bytes tion 4 boni i 1 M annels 1 SlotTime 2 V ST 2 PerDioduPhiOverhead 1 VIPRLO 5 Power 1 0 0 Bus powered eT poU Se Mode 1 Self powered 3 MaxResponseDelay 1 V MRD 5 ThisLink 2 V TL 6 MinlnterPduDelay 1 MMID aud Element E es Value Description 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld 1 MNUN meen d 8 PreambleExtension 1 V PhPE 1 Channel 1 1 0x00 In Use No Bad since last read No Silent 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE since last read No 10 MaxlnterC
76. used for FVX110 SynchronizaingDlcep 12 FasDllSubsriberTime Not used for FVX110 WindowSize 13 FasDllSubscriber Not used for FVX110 SynchronizationDlcep 14 FmsVfdld Sets VFD for FVX110 to be used 0x1 System network management VFD 0x1234 Function block VFD 15 FmsMaxOutstanding Set 0 to Server It is ServiceCalling not used for other applications 16 FmsMaxOutstanding Set 1 to Server It is ServiceCalled not used for other applications 17 FmsFeatures Indicates the type Supported of services in the application layer In the FVX110 it is automatically set according to specific applications 35 VCRs are factory set as shown in the Table 6 5 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt Table 6 5 VCR List Table 6 6 Link Object Parameters Index VCR e Sub SM Number Factory Setting index Parameter Description 303 1 For system management Fixed 1 Locallndex Sets the index of function 304 2 Server LocalAddr 0xF3 block parameters to be combined set 0 for Trend 305 3 Server LocalAddr 0xF4 and Alert 306 4 Server LocalAddr 0xF7 2 VcrNumber Sets the index of VCR to be 307 5 Trend Source LocalAddr 0x07 combined If set to 0 this Remote Address 0x111 link object is not used 308 6 Publisher for PID1 LocalAddr 3 Remotelndex Not used in FVX110 Set 0x20 to 0 l 309 7 Alert Source LocalAddr 0x07 4 ServiceO
77. value OUT is computed based on the change in control output AMVn which is calculated at each control period in accordance with the aforementioned algorithm The PID block in an FVX110 performs the velocity type output action for the control output A5 5 1 Velocity Type Output Action The PID block determines the value of the new control output OUT by adding the change in control output calculated in the current control period AMWVh to the current read back value of the MV Mee BKCAL IN This action can be expressed as AMVn AMVn OUT SCALE EU100 OUT SCALE EU 0 PV SCALE EU 100 PV SCALE EU 0 Direct Acting is False in CONTROL OPTS OUT BKCAL IN AMVn Direct Acting is True in CONTROL OPTS OUT BKCAL IN AMVn A5 6 Direction of Control Action The direction of the control action is determined by the Direct Acting setting in CONTROL OPTS Value of Direct Acting Resulting Action True The output increases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP False The output decreases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP IM 01S01C01 01EN A5 6 Appendix 5 PID Block A5 7 Control Action Bypass The PID control computation can be bypassed so as to set the SP value in the control output OUT as shown below Setting BYPASS to On bypasses the PID control computation There are eight modes for a PID block as shown o OUT C
78. 01C01 01EN A5 7 Appendix 5 PID Block Transition Destination Condition NOT Conditions Mode RCas 7 If RCas is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if neither IN status input to 3 are met status nor RCAS IN status is Bad ROut 8 If ROut is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if ROUT_IN status input to 3 are met status is not Bad In accordance 9 If RCAS_IN status or with the ROUT_IN status is Bad SHED_OPT indicating a computer setting failure see Section A5 17 1 for details To activate mode transitions to Auto Cas RCas and ROut the respective target modes must be set beforehand to MODE_BLK permitted We Atransition to Cas RCas or ROut requires that initialization of the cascade connection has been completed A5 10 Bumpless Transfer Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode MODE BLK and at switching of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block The action to perform a bumpless transfer differs depending on the MODE_BLK values A5 11 Setpoint Limiters Active setpoint limiters that limit the changes in the SP value differ depending on the block mode as follows A5 11 1 When PID Block Is in Auto Mode When the value of MODE_BLK is Auto the four types of limiters are in force high limit low limit r
79. 1 5 pees geg p Parameter W Valid Range ae 1 Ms Description Remarks 14 17014 17114 IN 4 0 5 5 Input 4 15 17015 17115 DISABLE 1 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 1 from being selected 16 17016 17116 DISABLE 2 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 2 from being selected 17 17017 17117 DISABLE 3 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 3 from being selected 18 17018 17118 DISABLE 4 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 4 from being selected 19 17019 17119 SELECT 1 6 0 Specifies the input selection algorithm TYPE 20 17020 17120 MN GOOD 0 8 0 Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status If the number of inputs with good status is less than the value of MIN GOOD input selection is canceled 21 17021 17121 SELECTED 0 8 0 2 2 Indicates the number of the selected input However it indicates the number of inputs used to calculate the average if SELECT TYPE Average If no input is selectable or if there are multiple inputs it becomes 0 none 22 17022 17122 OP_ 0 8 0 2 2 A parameter to forcibly employ the input of a SELECT selected number Operator settable 23 17023 17123 UPDATE_ Indicates event information if an update EVT event setting change occurs 24 17024 17124 BLOCK Indicates alarm information if a block alarm ALM occurs 25 17025 17125 IN_5 0 5 5
80. 1282 GQ Go h m 1247 uF v E 1283 MO Mo hm 1248 nF WIE 1284 oQ Ga hum 1249 pF p F 1285 mQ mto nm IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 13 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 1286 uQ E hom 1322 kg s kg s p 8 k g 287 S s 1323 kg min fom m 1288 kS k s 1324 kg h k g h 1289 mS m S 1325 kg d k g d 1290 uS u Ze 1326 Us i uds o h m t 1291 Qem v Xm 1327 t min e mi m G o h m 1292 Gem lt 1328 t h tJ oh Mo h m 1293 Mem im 1329 Ud t J d k o h m 1294 kQem ic m 1330 Ib s I b s o h m l b 1295 Qecm POCO 1331 Ib min anc on mo h m 1296 mem m 1332 Ib h I b h u o h m 1297 uQem s 1333 Ib d b d h S T 1298 nQem G 1334 STon s i I S T o n 1299 S m S m 1335 STon min am d mn S To n 1300 MS m MS m 1336 STon h h S To n 1301 kS m k S m 1337 STon d d m S L T o n 1302 mS cm e me 1338 LTon s los u S L T o hn 1303 uS mm i mom 1339 LTon min E mi Sn L T o n 1304 1 H 4 H 1340 LTon h h L T o n 1305 sr en 1341 LTon d I d 1306 Wier W s r 1342 ei WI S S o 1307 Wi srem2 E 1343 sol wt E i sol S o 308 W m2 WI m2 1344 Josol vol TE CNET S t m 1309 Im l m 1345 stmqual quail 96 310 Imes eme ss 1346 m3 min pla
81. 1563 inH2Oa 68 F S S E 1528 m3 mine 20 C 1atm rc 1564 inH2Og 68 F 1529 m3 h 20 C 1atm i CoS 1565 mmH2Oa uc Q 1530 m3 d 20 C 1atm J KS 1566 mmH20g uL B Q 1531 L 0 C 1atm LON 1567 mmH20a 4 C E C H S Y 1532 L s 0 C 1atm N 1568 mmH20g 4 C 5 gd S y 1533 L min 0 C 1atm a g 1569 mmH20a 68 F E 4 S E 1534 L h 0 C 1atm E l N 1570 mmH20g 68 F 4 C E S S 1535 L d 0 C 1atm S DE 1571 ftH20a 5 S 9 1536 L 20 C 1atm LS 1572 ftH20g E XB p 1537 L s 20 C 1atm 7 4 AE 1573 ftH20a 4 C i 2 A i IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 17 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD f o W2 O 1574 ftH2Og 4 C g 46 1610 AU A U f t H 2 Q C n t 1575 ftH2Oa 68 F a 6 8 E 1611 cnt g los fot RS 0 1576 ftH2Og 68 F g 6 8 F 1612 EBC EBC i n H g 1577 inHga p 1613 FTU FTU p i n RH g 1578 inHgg g 1614 OD O D j S i n Hg a U n i t 1579 inHga 0 C 0 Cc 1615 Unitless E WP J i n Hg g 1580 inHgg 0 C 0 C 1616 J g JI g m m H g 1581 mmHga p 1617 MI h MI h m m H g M I 1582 mmHgg g 1618 Ml min E omi m m m H a 1583 mmHga 0 C oc 4 1619 kL s k L s m m H k f t 4 1584 mmHgg 0 C 0 e I
82. 3 F0703 ai Figure7 3 Indicator value settings You can set the range of decimal places that are displayed after the decimal point from 0 to 4 digits The number of decimal places is automatically adjusted so that 5 digits are displayed Any measuring unit in the table of section 7 3 8 can be selected Here N indicates Normal normal state and S indicates Standard standard state for standard mass flow rate IM 01S01C01 01EN A NOTE When 5 digits are displayed the values beyond the decimal point are rounded off When the sum of displayed digits and decimal places is 5 or more digits the number of displayed digits and decimal place digits is automatically adjusted to 5 digits regardless of decimal place setting Sub Tag settings INxx MAIN TAG The Sub Tag is a memo field for making settings used for entering information for example Al1 OUT or AI1 PV1 and other I O block information that is to be displayed to identify a field instrument in addition to the information displayed by the Main Tag Use INxx SUB TAG xx 01 to 16 for setting Sub Tags A total of 32 characters can be displayed 14 of which appear on the screen HII PU Sub Tag settings F0704 ai Figure 7 4 Bar graph setting example BAR GRAPH SELECT EACH BAR GRAPH The bar graph in the lower field on the LCD allows the user to select either BAR GRAPH SELECT to display all IN xx xx 01 to 16 or to display an individual select
83. 32791 On start state error other than DWNLD_NOT_ 32768 Unsupported header version READY 32769 Abnormal header size 32792 Start segment error in module 1 32770 Abnormal manufacturer ID 32793 Binary file error 32771 Abnormal device family 32794 Binary file error 32772 Abnormal device revision 32795 _ Device error in module 2 32773 Abnormal vendor specification version 32796 Detection of EEPROM state other than backup 32774 Abnormal number of modules LUE ALT 32775 Abnormal number of bytes in module 1 ETSI Cis neers 32798 Notin DWNLD READY state when receiving 32776 Abnormal number of bytes in module 2 GenericDomainlnitiate 321 1 Device error inode 32799 Not in DWNLD OK state when receiving 32778 Checksum error in module 1 GenericDomainTerminate 32779 Checksum error in file 32800 Notin DOWNLOADING state when receiving 32780 Unused GenericDomainSegment 32781 Write prohibited area in FlashROM 32801 Firmware error 32782 Verification error during FlashROM writing 36863 Unused 32783 Polling error during FlashROM erasing 32784 Polling time out during FlashROM erasing 32785 Polling error during FlashROM writing 32786 Polling time out during FlashROM writing 32787 FlashROM driver undefined number error 32788 File endcode error 32789 File type error UPDATE ORIGINAL 32790 FlashROM driver undefined number error IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 8 Software Download
84. 40 to 140 F Encl Type 4X IP66 and IP67 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber e CSANonincendive Approval Class Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Class Il Division 2 Groups F amp G Class III Division 1 Ex nL IIC T4 Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Encl Type 4X IP66 and IP67 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 8 Caution for CSA Intrinsically safe type Following contents refer to DOC No ICS018 Installation Diagram for Intrinsically safe Division 1 Installation Terminator o o I Indicator I Terminator if i Non Hazardous Location Safety Barrier Lo Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 I 0 o D f jJ fF L F0207 ai The safety barrier must be CSA certified Input voltage of the safety barrier must be less than 250Vrms Vdc Installation should be in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part and local Electrical Code Do not alter drawing without authorization from CSA IM 01S01C01 01EN Electrical Data or or Rating 1 Entity For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Ui vmax 24 V dc li Imax 250 mA Pi Pmax 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH Rating 2 FISCO For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Ui vmax 17 5 V dc li Imax 500 mA Pi Pmax 5 5 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 mH
85. 8 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting FSTATE_STATUS List of inputs that have transitioned to a fault state CHANNEL A means for theoretically accessing LCD Transducer Block cannot be set on the FVX110 The MAO function block of the FVX110 can pass 8 inputs IN_1 IN_8 to LCD Transducer Block via CHANNEL However if an input is in a fault state status the previous value or a user set value FSTATE_VAL1 FSTATE_ VAL8 is passed depending on what options MO OPTS have been set A6 2 Block Mode The block mode is defined by the MODE BLK parameter Target Defines the destination of a mode transition amp Actual Indicates the current block mode This varies with input data status and target data m Permitted Defines restrictions on the destination of a mode transition Transitions to modes not defined here Q cannot be made Normal It defines regular modes The MAO function block can take the following three modes MODE_BLK Actual Support Mode Role O S Performs configuration changes when the system is shut down LO Enabled inputs enter the fault state status and the previous value or a user set value FSTATE_ VAL1 FSTATE_VAL8 is transferred to LCD Transducer Block Auto The block is in automatic operation mode The destination of the mode transition can be specified by MODE_BLK target but the destination of a transition cannot be set t
86. 8110 PV SCALE 100 O S Upper and lower scale limit values used 0 for scaling of the input IN value 1342 1 11 8011 8111 OUT SCALE 100 O S Upper and lower scale limit values used 0 for scaling of the control output OUT 1342 value to the values in the engineering 1 unit 12 8012 8112 GRANT DENY 0 AUTO Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to operating tuning and alarm parameters of the block 13 8013 8113 CONTROL 0 O S Setting for control action See Section OPTS A5 13 for details 14 8014 8114 STATUS_OPTS 0 O S See Section A5 15 for details 15 8015 8115 IN 0 Controlled value input 16 8016 8116 PV FTIME 2 AUTO Non negative Time constant in seconds of the first order lag filter applied to IN 17 8017 8117 BYPASS 1 off MAN 1 2 Whether to bypass the control computation 1 off Do not bypass 2 on Bypass 18 8018 8118 CAS IN 0 Cascade setpoint 19 8019 8119 SP RATE DN INF Positive Rate of decrease limit for setpoint SP 20 8020 8120 SP RATE UP INF Positive Rate of increase limit for setpoint SP 21 8021 8121 SP HI LIM 100 PV SCALE 10 Upper limit for setpoint SP IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 3 Index 22 Index PID1 8022 Index PID2 8122 Parameter Name SP LO LIM Default factory setting Write Valid Range PV SCALE 10 Description Lower limit for setpoint S
87. A Blk G NC A BIkL G NC A BIk H G NC A BIk C Active Block Alarm 0x84 0x85 0x86 0x87 G NC A Adv G NC A AdvL G NC A Adv H G NC A Adv C Active Advisory Alarm 0x88 0x89 Ox8A Ox8B xis G NC A Crit G NC A CritL G NC A Crit H G NC A Crit C Active Critical Alarm 0x8C Ox8D Ox8E Ox8F G NC U Blk G NC U BIkL G NC U BIk H G NC U BIk C Unack Black Alarm 0x90 0x91 0x92 0x93 G NC U_Adv G NC U_Adv L G NC U_Adv H G NC U_Adv C Unack Advisory Alarm 0x94 0x95 0x96 0x97 Se G NC U Crit G NC U Crit L G NC U Crit H G NC U Crit C Unack Critical Alarm 0x98 0x99 Ox9A Ox9B 1 G C NonSpc G C NonSpc L G C NonSpc H G C NonSpc C Pond esr Nonsspecitie 0xCO Va OxC2 OxC3 DANT G C InitAck G C InitAck L G C InitAck H G C InitAck C Initialization Acknowledge OxC4 0xC5 0xC6 OxC7 icicles G C InitReq G C InitReq L G C InitReq H G C InitReq C Initialization Request 0xC8 0xC9 OxCA OxCB G C Notlnv G C Notlnv L G C Notlnv H G C Notlnv C Notinviteg OxCC OxCD OxCE OxCF G C NotSel G C NotSel L G C NotSel H G C NotSel C Napsetected OxDO Wa OxD2 OxD3 G C LocOvr G C LocOvr L G C LocOvr H G C LocOvr C DEE OxD8 OxD9 OxDA OxDB o G C FSActiv G C FSActiv L G C FSActiv H G C FSActiv C Fault State Active OxDC OxDD OxDE OxDE G C InitFS G C InitFS L G C InitFS H G C InitFS C Initial Fault State OxEO OxE1 OxE2 OxE3 Invalid status will be indicated in case of code not listed in chart above IM 01S01C01 01EN 7 3 5 Indicator se
88. AO 1 in O S Mode MAO 1 Block is in O S mode C 0x00004000 MAO 1 in Man Mode MAO 1 Block is in Man mode C 0x00002000 MAO 1 Not Scheduled MAO 1 Block is not scheduled C 0x00000800 MAO2 in O S Mode MAC2 Block is in O S mode C 0x00000400 MAC2 in Man Mode MAC2 Block is in Man mode C 0x00000200 MAOZ2 Not Scheduled MAC2 Block is not scheduled C 0x00000080 IS1 in O S Mode IS1 Block is in O S mode C 0x00000040 IS1 in Man Mode IS1 Block is in Man mode C 0x00000020 IS1 Not Scheduled IS1 Block is not scheduled C 0x00000008 IS2 in O S Mode IS2 Block is in O S mode C 0x00000004 IS2 in Man Mode IS2 Block is in Man mode C 0x00000002 IS2 Not Scheduled IS2 Block is not scheduled C Table 11 3 Contents of DEVICE STATUS 3 index 1047 Hexadecimal Diplay through DD Description NE Heine MR 0x80000000 PID1 in O S Mode PID1 Block is in O S mode C 0x40000000 PID1 in Man Mode PID1 Block is in Man mode C 0x20000000 PID1 Not Scheduled PID1 Block is not scheduled C 0x10000000 PID1 in Bypass Mode PID1 Block is in Bypass mode C 0x08000000 PID2 in O S Mode PID2 Block is in O S mode C 0x04000000 PID2 in Man Mode PID2 Block is in Man mode C 0x02000000 PID2 Not Scheduled PID2 Block is not scheduled C 0x01000000 PID2 in Bypass Mode PID2 Block is in Bypass mode C 0x00080000 SC in O S Mode SC Block is in O S mode C 0x00040000 SC in Man Mode SC Block is in Man mode C 0x00020000 SC Not Scheduled SC Block is not scheduled C 0x00008000 IT in O S Mode IT Block is in O S mode C 0x00004000 I
89. AS INT t ROAS N Pon Control Geen P forward A5 8 Feed forward Feed forward is an action to add a compensation output signal FF_VAL to the output of the PID control computation and is typically used for feed forward control The figure below illustrates the action FA0502 ai FF_VAL Y FF SCALE OUT SCALE OUT PV PID computation FA0503 ai A5 9 Block Modes The block mode is set in the parameter MODE BLK MODE Target BLK Stipulates the target mode to which the PID block transfers Indicates the current mode of the PID block Stipulates all the modes that the PID block can enter The PID block is prohibited to enter any mode other than those set in this element Stipulates the mode in which the PID block normally resides Actual Permitted Normal below Block Mode Description ROut Remote output mode in which the PID block outputs the value set in ROUT IN RCas Remote cascade mode in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint SP set via the remote cascade connection such as from a computer and outputs the computed result Cas Cascade mode in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint SP set from another fieldbus function block and outputs the computed result Auto The PID block carries out automatic control and outputs the result computed by
90. ASK OxFFFFFFFF A parameter that specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32 bit Maintenance alarms listed in FD MAINT ACTIVE A parameter set by the user 78 1078 FD CHECK MASK OxFFFFFFFF AUTO Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32 bit Check Function alarms listed in FD CHECK ACTIVE 79 1079 FD FAIL ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under Failed 80 1080 FD OFFSPEC ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under Off Specification 81 1081 FD MAINT ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under Maintenance 82 1082 FD CHECK ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under Check Function 83 1083 FD FAIL PRI 0 AUTO Indicates the FD FAIL ALM priority for an alarm 84 1084 FD OFFSPEC PRI 0 AUTO Indicates the FD OFFSPEC ALM priority for an alarm 85 1085 FD MAINT PRI 0 AUTO Indicates theFD MAINT ALM priority for an alarm IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 4 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt prey Index Parameter Name Factory Default Hubs Explanation 86 1086 FD CHECK PRI 0 Indicates the FD CHECK ALM priority for an alarm 87 1087 FD SIMULATE A parameter for simulating an alarm 88 1088 FD RECOMMEN ACT 0 Indicates procedures for handling essential alarms 89 1089 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 1 1 O A parameter serving as a sta
91. At block execution period A2 1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block The following shows the schematic diagram of the Integrator block INTEG OPTS INPUT TYPE Q TIME UNIT1 E INTEG TYPE INTEG OPTS QUALITY 9 IN 1 Convert Rate dh Reverse GOOD LIM Forward UNCERT LIM FROW TYPE oe A PULSE_VAL1 REV_FLOW1 CN RESET INTEG_OPTS Add Integrate OUT INPUT TYPE TOTAL RTOTAL vo I 4 H pem IN 2 Convert Rate D o C agis INTEG OPTS OUT PTRIP ORI CARRY Ec Forward Compare Convert Accum ees C OP CMD INT RESET TOTAL_SP REV_FLOW2 PULSE_VAL2 SC OUT_TRIP MM FA0201 ai IN_1 Block input 1 value and status IN_2 Block input 2 value and status REV_FLOW1 Indicates whether the sign of IN 1 is reversed It is a discrete signal REV FLOWZ2 Indicates whether the sign of IN 2 is reversed It is a discrete signal RESET IN Resets the integrated values It is a discrete signal RESET CONFIRM Reset confirmation input It is a discrete signal OUT Block output value and status OUT PTRIP Set if the target value exceeds PRE TRIP It is a discrete signal OUT TRIP Set if the target value exceeds TOTAL SP or 0 It is a discrete signal The Integrator block is classified into the following five sections for each function Input process section Determines the input value status converts the rate and accumulation and determines the input flow direction Adder Adds the two inputs
92. C01 01EN A8 3 lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt Table A8 1 Actions after Software Update A8 6 Steps after Activating a Field Device Contents of Software Update Action When the communication with a field device has Does not change the number Re setup of parameters recovered after activating the device check using ot parameters lt needed um T S a block parameter etup O eadae the download tool that the software revision ofthe parameter needed field device has been updated accordingly The Adds a block Reengineering and value of SOFT_REV of the resource block indicates setup of the added the software revision block s parameters needed The PD tag node address and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvolatile memory inside the target device will remain unchanged after a software download However after a software update which causes an addition to the block parameters or blocks or to the system network management VFD parameters some parameters may be reset to the defaults thus requiring parameter setup and engineering again For details see the table A8 1 Changes the number of system network management VFD parameters Reengineering needed Also note that a change in the number of parameters or blocks requires the DD and capabilities files corresponding to the new software revision A8 7 Troubleshooting For information on the download to
93. C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 0 5 C22 2 No 25 C22 2 No 30 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 213 C22 2 No 60079 0 C22 2 No 60079 1 C22 2 No 61010 1 04 Explosion proof for Class Groups B C and D CF1 Dustignition proof for Class II III Groups E F and G When installed in Division 2 SEAL NOT REQUIRED Enclosure TYPE 4X Temp Class T6 Exd IIC T6 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Amb Temp 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F CSA Intrinsically safe Approval Canadian Certificate 2346277 Standards Applicable Standard C22 2 No 0 C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 25 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 157 C22 2 No 213 Association C22 2 No 61010 1 04 CSA CAN CSA E60079 0 CAN CSA E60079 11 CAN CSA E60079 15 IEC 60529 Intrinsically Safe for Class I Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Class Il Division 1 Groups E F amp G Class III Division 4 Ex ia IIC T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Encl Type 4X IP66 and IP67 CS15 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 13 General Specifications gt 13 4 Item Description IECEx Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard IEC 60079 0 IEC60079 1 Certificate IECEx KEM 10 0071 Flameproof for Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Amb Temp 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Code SF25 IECEx Intrinsically safe and type n Approval No IECEx DEK 11 0004 X IECEx Applicable Standard IEC 60079 0 IEC 60079 11 IEC 60079 26 IEC 60079 27 Scheme Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga Ex ic IIC TA GC Ambient Temperature 40
94. CD when it is on and when it is off Turns Squawk on and off 32 2032 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Indicates amplifier temperature 33 2033 MAIN CONNECT TYPE Use to set the connection MAO or ISEL function block for 16 inputs at one time 0 All 16 inputs are input to simulation 1 All 16 inputs are connected to MAO FB 2 All 16 inputs are connected to ISEL FB 34 2034 INO1 CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO1 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 1 INO1 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO1 35 2035 INO2 CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO2 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 1 INO2 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO2 36 2036 INO3 CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO3 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB 1 INO3 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO3 37 2037 INO4 CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO4 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_1 IN04 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO4 38 2038 INO5 CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO5 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_1 IN05 2 Connected to ISEL FB 1 INO5 39 2039 INOG CONNECTION Use to specify what values of INO6 are connected to 0 Simulation dISELplay 1 Connected to MAO FB_1 INO6 2 Connected to ISEL FB
95. CLOCK_PER PER amp DEM 7 un RESET IN 7 1 x Starting from 0 0 RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF AccTotal lt INF Legend O Trip output is made x No trip output is made A2 5 Output Process There are the following three output parameters 1 OUT 2 OUT_TRIP 3 OUT_PTRIP Parameters OUT TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are used only when INTEG TYPE is a value from 1 to 4 A2 5 1 Status Determination The same criteria for determining the status of the output of the Integrator block are used in common for the above three parameters Bad Uncertain GOOD SS PCT INCL UNCERT LIM 0 GOOD_LIM 100 PCT INCL 7100x 1 msp of RTotal msp of ATotal msp of RTotal RTotal value that is converted into a short floating point number msp of ATotal ATotal value that is converted into a short floating point number RTotal Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments whose status is bad ATotal Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments regardless of the output status Figure A2 4 Status of OUT OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP Outputs FA0204 ai IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 6 OUT Value OUT_TRIP Status and OUT_PTRIP Status are determined by the ratio of the Good integrated values to all integrated values which is stored in PCT_INCL 0 to 100 The user must set the threshold value of each status to UNCERT_LIM
96. Certification Note 5 Special Conditions for Safe Use Inthe case where the enclosure of the segment indicator is made of aluminium if itis mounted in an area where the use of category 1 G apparatus is required it must be installed such that even in the event of rare incidents ignition sources due to impact and friction sparks are excluded Note 6 Installation instructions The test voltage for the isolation between the intrincically safe supply output circuit and the frame of the apparatas for segment indicator that are provided with surge protection is limited to 90 V due to the presence of the surge protection device only When used in a potentially explosive atmosphere requiring the use of apparatus of equipment category 1D or 2D certified cable entry devices shall be used that are suitable for the application and correctly installed e FISCO Model Non Hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit and Terminator Safety Barrier FISCO Model FISCO Model i Exi U t oco J Y Y Y Terminator Hand held Data Terminal KT l Field Instruments Passive F0209 ai I S fieldbus system complying with FISCO IM 01S01C01 01EN The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current li and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo
97. E When determination of the flow direction of two input values is complete these two inputs are passed to the adder The settings in REV FLOW will be retained even if the power is turned OFF A2 3 Adder When input processing is complete two arguments that have been rate and accumulate converted will be passed to the adder The adder adds these two values according to the option A2 3 1 Status of Value after Addition If one of the statuses of two arguments is Bad or if two of them are both Bad the status of the value after addition becomes Bad In this case the value of Good just before the status changed to Bad is used as the addition value see A2 1 When the statuses of two arguments are both Good the status of the value after addition becomes Good In this case the status of the value after addition will be used for the status applied to integration IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 4 A2 3 2 Addition The following three options are available for addition TOTAL Adds two argument values as is FORWARD Adds two argument values regarding a negative value as O REVERSE Adds two argument values regarding a positive value as 0 You can choose these options using bit 2 and bit 3 of INTEG OPTS as follows Bit 2 ofINTEG OPTS Bit3 of INTEG OPTS Flow Forward Flow Reverse Adder Options TOTAL TOTAL FORWARD REVERSE The result of t
98. EX contrassegnati con Ex sono disponibili in inglese tedesco e francese Se si desidera ricevere i manuali operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua locale mettersi in contatto con l ufficio Yokogawa pi vicino o con un rappresentante Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos antiexplosivos de ATEX est n disponibles en ingl s alem n y franc s Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de estos art culos antiexplosivos en su idioma local deber ponerse en contacto con la oficina o el representante de Yokogawa m s cercano Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken hebben met ATEX explosiebeveiliging Ex zijn verkrijgbaar in het Engels Duits en Frans Neem indien u aanwijzingen op het gebied van explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of met een vertegenwoordiger Kaikkien ATEX Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden k ytt hjeet ovat saatavilla englannin saksan ja ranskankielisina Mik li tarvitsette Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita omalla paikallisella kielell nnne ottakaa yhteytt l himp n Yokogawa toimistoon tai edustajaan Todos os manuais de instru es referentes aos produtos Ex da ATEX est o dispon veis em Ingl s Alem o e Franc s Se necessitar de instru es na sua l ngua relacionadas com produtos Ex dever entrar em contacto com a delega o mais pr xima ou com um representante da Yokogawa Tous les manuels d instruction des p
99. F7 in hexadecimal FasDllConfigured RemoteAddr Sets the node address of the called party for communication and the address DLSAP or DLCEP used to specify VCR in that address For DLSAP or DLCEP a range of 20 to F7 in hexadecimal is used Addresses in Subindex 2 and 3 need to be set to the same contents of the VCR as the called party local and remote are reversed FasDIISDAP Specifies the quality of communication Usually one of the following types is set Ox2B Server 0x01 Source Alert 0x03 Source Trend 0x91 Publisher Subscriber FasDIIMaxConfirm DelayOnConnect To establish connection for communication a maximum wait time for the called party s response is set in ms Typical value is 60 secounds 60000 FasDIIMaxConfirm DelayOnData For request of data a maximum wait time for the called party s response is set in ms Typical value is 60 secounds 60000 Sub Pare index Parameter Description 7 FasDlIMaxDisduSize Specifies maximum DL Service Data unit Size DLSDU Set 256 for Server and Trend VCR and 64 for other VCRs 8 FasDllResidual Specifies whether ActivitySupported connection is monitored Set TRUE Oxff for Server This parameter is not used for other communication 9 FasDlITimelinessClass Not used for FVX110 10 FasDllPublisherTime Not used for FVX110 WindowSize 11 FasDllPublisher Not
100. FVX110 link object See Block setting in Section 6 6 for the details It is also possible to read values from the host at proper intervals instead of connecting the FVX110 block output to other blocks The combined blocks need to be executed synchronously with other blocks on the communications schedule In this case change the FVX110 schedule according to the following table The values in the table are factory settings Table 6 3 Execution Schedule of the FVX110 Function Blocks Index Parameters Setting Enclosed is factory setting 269 MACROCYCLE_ Cycle SM DURATION MACROCYCLE period of control or measurement Unit is 1 32 ms 32000 1 0 s 276 FB START ENTRY 1 Excution block startup SM time Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32 ms 0 2 0s 277 FB START ENTRY2 Excution block startup to to time 291 FB START ENTRY 16 Elapsed time from the SM start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32 ms 0 2 0s A maximum of 30 ms is taken for execution of MAO function block and IS function block For scheduling of communications for combination with the next function block the execution is so arranged as to start after a lapse of longer than 30 ms In no case should function blocks of the FVX110 be executed atthe same time execution time is overlapped Figure 6 3 shows an example of schedule based on the loop shown in Figure 6 2 F0602 ai Figure 6 2 E
101. Fieldbus Foundation and provides interoperability between Yokogawa devices and those produced by other manufacturers For information on other features engineering design construction work startup and maintenance of Fieldbus refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K03A01 01E 4 2 Internal Structure of FVX110 The FVX110 contains two virtual field devices VFD that share the following functions 4 2 1 System network Management VFD Sets node addresses and Physical Device tags PD Tag necessary for communication Controls the execution of function blocks Manages operation parameters and communication resources Virtual Communication Relationship VCR 4 2 2 Function Block VFD 1 Resource block Manages the status of FVX110 hardware Automatically informs the host of any detected faults or other problems 2 LCD Transducer block Controls the display of the integral indicator 3 MAO function block Transfers 8 analog variables of the IO subsystem to transducer block using 8 input parameters IN 1 to IN 89 4 PID function block Performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value from the setpoint 5 SC function block Uses the line segment function to convert input signal values 6 IT function block Integrates input signal values 7 IS function block Same as MAO function block this block transfer 8 analog variables IN_1 to IN_8
102. Gc Type of Protection II3G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 32 0 V Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 Note 3 Installation n any safety barrier used output current must be limited by a resistor R such that lo UOo R The safety barrier must be IECEx certified Input voltage of the safety barrier must be less than 250 Vrms Vdc The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and will void IECEx Intrinsically safe certification 2 Handling Cautions gt Intrinsically safe apparatus level of protection ia Terminator o o 1 Feet 4 O F o Indicator o eS SS SS a EE qnt T toL l E Field Instruments roc i A i 39 DOR a a An Field Instruments NE eee ee RE i Hazardous Location EE Non Hazardous Location Terminator PREPARARE i 0 Safety Barrier I ot PE H NM al F0214 ai Intrinsically safe apparatus level of protection ic i Terminator TER ERR 1 0o E Indicator Oo i oS oe se Se eee l b Field Instruments i O c Zeie dE Penn l feet REESE EU TO e 1 l o Field Instruments tot ji Hazardous Location pigs these i No
103. Groups A B C amp D Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class II Division 2 Groups F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class l Zone 2 Group IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class III Division 1 Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X Electrical Connection 1 2 NPT female M20 female Caution for FM Intrinsically safe type Following contents refer to DOC No IFMOA40 A11 p 1 to p 6 m IFM040 A11 e Installation Diagram for Intrinsically safe Division 1 Installation Terminator Oo I We eel See el sl O Lo Indicator OF z aS ende Euer de E eee Ss n l Be Field Instruments O e E E DE 1 eege 4 o Field Instruments tO i ij Hazardous Location HR RUNE Non Hazardous Location I Terminator I 1 1 0 o Safety Barrier o 0 ef Met t f f L F0203 ai lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 4 Note 1 Barrier must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA 61010 1 Note 2 Control equipment connected to the Associ ated Apparatus must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc Note 3 Installation should be in accordance with ANSI ISA 12 06 01 Installation of Intrinsi cally Safe Systems for Hazardous Classified Locations and the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Sections 504 and 505 Note 4 The configuration of Associated Appar
104. I HI LIM value and whose priority order is defined in HI HI PRI Priority order Only one alarm is generated at a time When two or more alarms occur at the same time the alarm having the highest priority order is generated When the PV value has decreased below HI HI LIM ALM HYS HI HI ALM is reset 61 8061 8161 HI_ALM As above 62 8062 8162 LO ALM As above Reset when the PV value has increased above LO LIM ALM HYS 63 8063 8163 LO LO ALM As above 64 8064 8164 DV HI ALM Alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has exceeded the DV HI LIM value Other features are the same as HI HI ALM 65 8065 8165 DV LO ALM Alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has decreased below the DV LO LIM value Other features are the same as LO LO ALM IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 5 A5 4 PID Computation Details A5 4 1 PV proportional and derivative Type PID I PD Control Algorithm For PID control the PID block employs the PV proportional and PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the I PD control algorithm in Auto and RCas mode The I PD control algorithm ensures control stability against sudden changes in the setpoint such as when the user enters a new setpoint value At the same time the I PD algorithm ensures excellent controllability by performing proportional integral and deriv
105. ICE STATUS 6 4 51 DEVICE STATUS 7 4 52 DEVICE STATUS 8 4 53 SOFTDWN PROTECT 1 54 SOFTDWN FORMAT 1 55 SOFTDWN COUNT 2 56 SOFTDWN ACT AREA 1 57 SOFTDWN MOD REV 16 58 SOFTDWN ERROR 2 59 SOFTDWN HISTORY 60 SOFTDWN HIST INDEX 61 COMPATIBILITY REV 1 62 CAPABILITY LEV 1 63 CAPABILITY CONFIG 2 64 WRITE LOCK LEVEL 65 SI CONTROL CODES 66 FD VER 2 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt pees Parameter Mnemonic 1 iew 4 67 IN01_SUB_TAG 68 IN01_SCALE 69 IN02_MAIN_TAG 70 IN02_SUB_TAG 71 IN02_SCALE 72 IN03_MAIN_TAG 73 IN03_SUB_TAG 74 IN03_SCALE 75 IN04_MAIN_TAG 76 IN04_SUB_TAG 77 IN04_SCALE 78 IN05 MAIN TAG 79 IN05 SUB TAG 80 IN05 SCALE 81 INOG MAIN TAG 82 IN06 SUB TAG 83 IN06 SCALE 84 IN07 MAIN TAG 85 IN07 SUB TAG 86 IN07 SCALE 87 IN08 MAIN TAG 88 IN08 SUB TAG 89 IN08 SCALE 90 IN09 MAIN TAG 91 IN09 SUB TAG 92 IN09 SCALE 93 IN10 MAIN TAG 94 IN10 SUB TAG 95 IN10 SCALE 96 IN11 MAIN TAG 97 IN11 SUB TAG 98 IN11 SCALE 99 IN12 MAIN TAG 100 IN12 SUB TAG 101 IN12 SCALE 102 IN13 MAIN TAG 103 IN13 SUB TAG 104 IN13 SCALE 105 IN14 MAIN TAG 106 IN14 SUB TAG 107
106. IN 04 5 5 54 IN 05 5 5 55 IN 06 5 5 56 IN 07 5 5 57 IN 5 5 58 IN 09 5 5 59 IN 10 5 5 60 IN 11 5 5 61 IN 12 5 5 62 IN 5 5 63 IN 14 5 5 64 IN 15 5 5 65 IN 16 5 5 66 IN01 MAIN TAG IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 10 Table 6 12 Indexes of View for Each Block VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW 1 2 3 4 Resourse Block 40100 40101 40102 40103 LCD Transducer Block 40250 40251 40252 40253 PID1 Function Block 40800 40801 40802 40803 PID2 Function Block 40810 40811 40812 40813 MAO 1 Function Block 41000 41001 41002 41003 MAC2 Function Block 41010 41011 41012 41013 SC Function Block 41450 41451 41452 41453 IT Function Block 41600 41601 41602 41603 IS1 Function Block 41700 41701 41702 41703 IS2 Function Block 41710 41711 41712 41713 AR1 Function Block 41750 41751 41752 41753 AR2 Function Block 41760 41761 41762 41763 6 6 4 Function Block Parameters Function block parameters can be read from the host or can be set For a list of the parameters of blocks refer to 12 Parameter Lists For the function blocks LM function and software download function refer to Appendix 1 to 8 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 1 7 Explanation of Basic Items T 1 Outline This chapter provides an outline of the LCD transducer block and describes basic
107. IN14 SCALE 108 IN15 MAIN TAG 109 IN15 SUB TAG 110 IN15 SCALE 111 IN16 MAIN TAG 112 IN16 SUB TAG 113 IN16 SCALE 114 MS CODE 115 SERIAL NO 116 MANUFAC DATE 117 TEST KEY1 118 TEST KEY2 119 TEST KEY 120 TEST 1 121 TEST2 122 TEST 3 123 TEST 4 124 TEST 5 125 TEST 6 Total bytes 104 23 104 34 Table 6 11 View Object for LCD Transducer Block Relative Parameter Mnemonic View Index 1 ST REV 2 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT KEY 1 5 MODE BLK 6 BLOCK ERR 7 UPDATE EVT 8 BLOCK ALM 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY 10 TRANSDUCER TYPE 2 11 XD ERROR 12 COLLECTION DIRECTORY 13 NOW DISPLAYING 14 DISP TARGET FORCE 15 NO OF VALID CON 16 VALID CON SUMMARY 2 17 MAO CON SUMMARY 18 ISEL CON SUMMARY 19 SIM CON SUMMARY 20 BAR GRAPH SELECT 1 21 EACH BAR GRAPH 22 MAIN TAG SCROLL 1 23 IV SCROLL BAR 1 24 SCROLL DIRECTION 1 25 DISP PAGE INFO 1 26 DISP QUIET MODE 27 DISP FORMAT TYPE 1 28 DISPLAY CYCLE 1 29 DISPLAY TEST 30 DISPLAY CONTRAST 1 31 SQUAWK 32 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 33 MAIN CONNECT TYPE 1 34 IN01 CONNECTION 1 35 IN02 CONNECTION 1 36 INO3 CONNECTION 1 37 IN04 CONNECTION 1 38 INO5 CONNECTION 1 39 IN06 CONNECTION 1 40 IN07 CONNECTION 1 41 INO CONNECTION 1 42 INO09 CONNECTION 1 43 IN10_CONNECTION 1 44 IN11 CONNECTION 1 45 IN12 CONNECTION 1 46 IN13 CONNECTION 1 47 IN14 CONNECTION 1 48 IN15 CONNECTION 1 49 IN16 CONNECTION 1 50 IN 01 5 5 51 IN 02 5 5 52 NO 5 5 53
108. ITY X Input FA0103 ai Figure A1 3 Example of Curve SWAP 2 off The range of CURVE X X1 to X6 X7 and above are invalid because INFINITY has been configured for X7 1 The X1 to X6 values always increase in a monotone manner X1 lt X2 lt X3 lt X4 lt X5 lt X6 If an input value is smaller than X1 itis set to Y1 If an input value is larger than X6 it is set to Y6 The range of CURVE Y Y1 to Y6 It is acceptable if the Y1 to Y6 values do not increase in a monotone manner However if the setting of SWAP_2 is changed from off to on the values of CURVE_Y must increase or decrease in a monotone manner Thus if a value of CURVE_Y does not increase or decrease in a monotone manner in this setting the mode changes to O S causing the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK_ERR to be set 1 For any points of the curve that are not used configure INFINITY for all of them IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 4 Example of the case where SWAP 2 is on monotone increase The input range of IN 1 is always in CURVE X The following shows the input output graph of the IN 1 values Y Output A Y6 High limit Y1 Low limit i d Xi x2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 INFINITY X Input FA0104 ai Figure A1 4 Example of Curve for IN_1 SWAP_2 on The input range of IN 2 is always in CURVE Y The following shows the input output graph of the IN 2 values
109. Improper and or inadequate maintenance by the purchaser Malfunction or damage due to a failure to handle use or store the instrument in accordance with the design specifications Use of the product in question in a location not conforming to the standards specified by Yokogawa or due to improper maintenance of the installation location Failure or damage due to modification or repair by any party except Yokogawa or an approved representative of Yokogawa Malfunction or damage from improper relocation of the product in question after delivery Reason of force majeure such as fires earthquakes storms floods thunder lightening or other natural disasters or disturbances riots warfare or radioactive contamination IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 1 Introduction gt 1 3 1 3 ATEX Documentation This is only applicable to the countries in European Union 0 0000000 amp All instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products are available in English German and French Should you require Ex related instructions in your local language you are to contact your nearest Yokogawa office or representative Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til ATEX Ex er tilg ngelige pa engelsk tysk og fransk Skulle De nske yderligere oplysninger om h ndtering af Ex produkter p eget sprog kan De rette henvendelse herom til den n rmeste Yokogawa afdeling eller forhandler Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti AT
110. Input 5 26 17026 17126 IN 6 0 5 5 Input 6 27 17027 17127 IN_7 0 5 5 Input 7 28 17028 17128 IN_8 0 5 5 Input 8 29 17029 17129 DISABLE_5 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 5 from being selected 30 17030 17130 DISABLE 6 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 6 from being selected 31 17031 17131 DISABLE 7 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 7 from being selected 32 17032 17132 DISABLE 8 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 8 from being selected IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 1 6 A3 6 Application Example The following describes the temperature control system of a fixed bed type reactor In this case there are instances where the point showing the maximum temperature changes due to catalytic deterioration raw material flow etc Therefore a large number of measurement points are provided and the maximum value obtained among these measurement points is input to the controller to control reactor temperature Raw material fan A o a LE Uo Z fo 9 ES Refrigerant FA0310 ai Figure A3 10 Temperature Control System of a Fixed Bed type Reactor Alt IS PID AO OUT FR IN 14 OUT IN OUT CAS IN BKCAL IN 1BKCAL OUT Ali Al4
111. LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 1000 K K 1035 dm3 d m 1001 C c 1036 cm3 cum 1002 F gt F 1037 mm3 mm a 1003 R e R 1038 L L 1004 rad ro ad 1039 cl c 1005 bi j 1040 ml mi 1006 min 1041 hl h 1007 sec 1042 in3 i n 3 1008 gon gon 1043 ft3 f t 3 1009 rev BEEN 1044 yd3 y d 1010 m m 1045 mile2 m id ve 1011 km k m 1046 pint pi nt 1012 cm NES 1047 quart quart 1013 mm mom 1048 gal g al 1014 um ue ob 1049 Imp Gal e b u s h 1015 nm n m 1050 bushel e 1016 pm pm 1051 bbl b b I 1017 A A 1052 bbl liquid g a 1018 ft ot 1053 SCF SCE 1019 in i n 1054 Sec s 1020 yd y d 1055 ksec k s 1021 mile mi e 1056 msec m s 1022 nautical mile S e d 1057 sec mi e H u s 1023 m2 m 2 1058 min opu 1024 km2 k m 1059 h h 1025 cm2 c m2 1060 d d 1026 dm2 d m 1061 m s neci s 1027 mm2 mom 2 1062 mm s mim us 1028 a 4 1063 m h TE 1029 ha ha 1064 km h k m h 1030 in2 i on 1065 knot kn uod 1031 ft2 ft 2 1066 in s Lom 38 1032 yd2 y d 1067 ft s Se 2 1033 mile2 mi dicm 3 1068 yd s E 1034 m3 d 1069 in min 3 IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 1 0 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 4 t 4 b 070 ft min
112. LOCK ERR Block Configuration Error is set A2 6 3 Reset Process The basic reset process sequence is as follows 1 Snapshot Clearing the integrated values Reset count increment Judging OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP see A2 5 1 Snapshot Saves the following values in the specified parameters before clearing the integrated values These values will be retained until the next reset is made STOTAL Total SRTOTAL RTotal SSP TOTAL SP 2 Clearing the integrated values The reset process clears the Total ATotal and RTotal values in the internal registers Total 0 ATotal 0 RTotal 0 3 Reset count increment Each time a reset is made the N RESET parameter will be incremented The high limit is 999 999 and if this limit is exceeded the count returns to 0 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt 4 Judging OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP see A2 5 OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP are judged again on the basis of the cleared integrated values There are three options relating to a reset Confirm reset bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS ii Carry bit 6 ofINTEG OPTS iii Generate reset event bit 9 of INTEG OPTS i Confirm reset bit 8 of INTEG OPTS If this option is enabled the next reset is rejected until 1 is setto RESET CONFIRM ii Carry bit 6 of INTEG OPTS If this option is enabled while INTEG TYPE is UP AUTO or DN AUTO the value exceeding the threshold at a reset will be carried into the next integratio
113. Maximum time for which values can be retained in the event of power failure It does not effect the block operation 38 RESET_ CONFIRM Reset confirmation input which is enabled when the Confirm reset option of INTEG_OPTS is chosen IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 11 index Parameter Initial Write Definition Name Value Mode 1 39 UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information if an update event occurs 40 BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs 41 ACCUM 0 0 Accumulated integrated values no extension parameter is reset TOTAL IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 1 Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block The function of the Input Selector IS block is to automatically select one signal from multiple input signals using a specified selection method The IS block is used for selective control in which one measured quantity is selected from multiple measured quantities to be transmitted to the controller as a controlled variable This feature is primarily used for temperature control systems A3 1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic The following shows the Input Selector function block schematic
114. Mcal min Pme m 1472 mlimpGal h Ga h M c a k m p 1437 Mcal d md 1473 klmpGal h Ga H M m p 1438 kJ s k J 1 s 1474 MimpGal d Ga h k J m 1439 kJ min am T ooh 1475 ulmpGal d e a 1 d m m p 1440 kJ h k II h 1476 mlmpGal d Ga d k m p 1441 kJ d ke J dod 1477 klmpGal d Gali a M I m p 1442 MJ s MJ s 1478 MimpGal d Ga d M J b b 1443 MJ min M NEA 1479 Mbps S s m b b 1444 MJ d MJ d 1480 mbbl s Is B t k b b I 1445 Btu s j 3 1481 kbbl s 8 i B t u M b b I 1446 Btu min mi n 1482 Mbbl s fg B t i b b 1447 Btuld e a 1483 ubi f qmod om u g a I m b b I 1448 ugal s i e 1484 mbbl min m d n mg a I J k b b 1449 mgal s aa 1485 kbbl min a n k g a I M b b I 1450 kgal s 1 8 1486 Mbbl min Lom om M g a u b b I 1451 Mgal s 19298 1487 ubbl h I h ug a I m b b 1452 ugal min lc Wed dh 1488 mbbl h h m a I k b b 1453 mgal min I S jn 1489 SE h k g a I M b b I 1454 kgal min i mea de 1490 Mbbi h h Mg a I u b b 1455 Mgal min j um um 1491 ubbl d I d u g a I m b b 1456 ugal h h 1492 mbbl d d mg a I k b b 1457 mgal h h 1493 kbbl d d k g a I M b b I 1458 kgal h 1 h 1494 Mbbl d d M g a u m 1459 Mgal h T 1495 um3 s ju u g a I m m 1460 ugal d d 1496 mm3 s los mg a I k m 3 1461 mgl d d 1497 km3 s los k g a Mm 1462 kgal d d 1498 M3 s j 28 m m 1463 ulmpGal s Aa 1499 um3 min do A m m m m 1464 mimpGal s G a A s 1500 mm3 min lcm dan k m p 3 k
115. N UCR L Q O p FSTATE_VALX TRANSDUCER BLOCK BLOCK INPUTS ee i INSTA FSTATE STATUS IN 6 LA IN 7 LA IN 8 LA Ly FSTATE VAL1 to 8 FA0601 ai Input parameter input IN_1 Input 1 status value IN_2 Input 2 status value IN_3 Input 3 status value IN_4 Input 4 status value IN_5 Input 5 status value IN_6 Input 6 status value IN_7 Input 7 status value IN_8 Input 8 status value IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block gt A6 2 Other parameters ESTATE VAL1 we transferred as input 1 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting FSTATE VAL2 Value transferred as input 2 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional e setting ESTATE VAL3 Value transferred as input 3 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting ESTATE VALA Vale transferred as input 4 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting FSTATE VAL5 value transferred as input 5 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting ESTATE VALG Value transferred as input 6 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional setting ESTATE VAL7 value transferred as input 7 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state status optional u setting ESTATE VAL8 Value transferred as input
116. NELEC ATEX DEKRA Intrinsically Safe Type Caution for CENELEC ATEX DEKRA Intrinsically safe type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code KS25 for potentially explosive atmospheres No DEKRA 11ATEX0022 X Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 2009 EN 60079 11 2007 EN 60079 26 2007 EN 60079 27 2008 EN 61241 11 2006 Note 2 Ratings Type of Protection and Marking Code II1G Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga II1D Ex ia IIIC T80 C Da IP6X Group Il Category 1G 1D Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T80 C Tamb 40 to 60 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Electrical Data When combined with Trapezoidal output characteristic FISCO model IIC or IIB barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH When combined with Linear characteristic barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 24 0 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Note 3 Installation All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements Refer to the installation diagram Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void DEKRA Intrinsically safe
117. NLD instruction of download cancellation Indicates the current download status DWNLD NOT READY download not ready DWNLD PREPARING download under preparation DWNLD READY ready for download DWNLD OK download complete DOWNLOADING download underway CHECKSUM FAIL not used in this product FMS DOWNLOAD FAIL failure during download DWNLD INCOMPLETE download error detected at restart VCR FAIL not used in this product 10 OTHER download error other than 6 and 7 detected OO JO Om P G bhM A Error Code Indicates the error during a download and activation 0 success configuration retained download successfully completed 32768 65535 Download error See Table 8 4 for error codes Download Domain Index Indicates the index number of the domain for software downloading Download Domain Header Index Indicates the index number of the domain header to which the download is performing Activated Domain Header Index Domain Name Indicates the index numbers of the domain header currently running Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicates the field device name IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt A8 7 3 DOMAIN_HEADER Sub Size index Element Bytes Description 1 Header Version Number 2 Indicates the version number of the header 2 Header Size 2 Indicates the header si
118. P 23 8023 8123 GAIN Proportional gain 7 100 proportional band 24 8024 8124 RESET Integration time seconds 25 8025 8125 BAL TIME Positive Unused 26 8026 8126 RATE Positive Derivative time seconds 27 8027 8127 BKCAL IN Read back of control output 28 8028 8128 OUT HI LIM OUT SCALE 10 Upper limit for control output OUT 29 8029 8129 OUT LO LIM OUT SCALE 10 Lower limit for control output OUT 30 8030 8130 BKCAL HYS 0 to 50 Hysteresis for release from a limit for OUT status 31 8031 8131 BKCAL OUT Read back value to be sent to the BKCAL IN in the upper block 32 8032 8132 RCAS IN Remote setpoint set from a computer etc 33 8033 8133 ROUT IN Remote control output value set from a computer etc 34 8034 8134 SHED OPT Action to be performed in the event of mode shedding SHED OPT defines the changes to be made to MODE BLK target and MODE BLK actual when the value of RCAS_IN status or ROUT IN status becomes Bad if MODE BLK actual RCas or ROut See Section A5 17 1 for details 35 8035 8135 RCAS OUT Remote setpoint sent to a computer etc 36 8036 8136 ROUT OUT Remote control output value 37 8037 8137 TRK SCALE 100 1342 MAN Upper and lower scale limits used
119. PERATURE AMBIANTE 2 65 C UTILISEZ DES CABLES RESISTANTES A LA CHALEUR 2 90 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing to the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation of America is prohibited and will void Canadian Standards Explosionproof Certification IM 01S01C01 01EN Non Hazardous Locations Non hazardous Location Equipment 32 V DC Max 15 mA DC Signal Non Hazardous Locations Non hazardous Location Equipment 32 V DC Max 15 mA DC Signal Sealing Fitting Sealing Fitting Hazardous Locations Division 1 50 cm Max a Conduit Segment Indicator Hazardous Locations Division 2 Segment Indicator F0206 ai b CSA intrinsically safe and Nonincendive Type FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code CS15 Certificate 2346277 Applicable standard C22 2 No 0 C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 25 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 157 C22 2 No 213 C22 2 No 61010 1 04 C22 2 CAN CSA E60079 0 CAN CSA E60079 11 CAN CSA E60079 15 IEC 60529 e CSA Intrinsically Safe Approval Class Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Class II Division 1 Groups E F amp G Class III Division 1 Ex ia IIC T4 Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C
120. Protected IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 3 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt Relative Write S Index Index Parameter Name Factory Default Mode Explanation 54 1054 SOFTDWN FORMAT 0x01 Selects the software download method 0x01 Standard 0x02 YOKOGAWA Standard 55 1055 SOFTDWN COUNT 0 Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was erased 56 1056 SOFTDWN ACT 0 Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM AREA 0 FlashROM 0 working 1 FlashROM 1 working 57 1057 SOFTDWN MOD 1 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates the software module revision REV 0 0 0 58 1058 SOFTDWN ERROR JO Indicates the error during a software download Refer Table A8 4 59 1059 SOFTDWN HISTORY Not used by the FVX110 60 1060 SOFTDWN HIST INDEX 0 Not used by the FVX110 61 1061 COMPATIBILITY REV 1 Indicates the smallest Rev value compatible with device DevRev 62 1062 CAPABILITY LEV 0x00 Indicates the capability level of instrument interior 63 1063 CAPABILITY CONFIG 0x0000 A parameter corresponding to AP CONF or DEV OPTIONS before the addition of parameter CAPABILITY LEV 64 1064 WRITE LOCK LEVEL 2 Specifies blocks that activates Write Lock 65 1065 SI CONTROL CODES 1 A parameter for switching to make the instrument compatible with SI units 66 1066 FD VER 0 Indicates value of major version of instrument diagnostics speci
121. RANGE HI RANGE_ LO RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO are threshold values for switching two main inputs seamlessly PV IN_LO PV gxIN 1 9 xIN_LO Formula baed on 1 and 2 1 Range EE Pd 7 4 l l I l I l RANGE_LO RANGE_HI IN FA0402 ai Figure A4 2 Range Extension Function and PV lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 2 PV is a parameter with status information and PV status is determined by the value of g If g lt 0 5 The status of IN LO is used If g 2 0 5 The status of IN is used Determination of the status is made with a hysteresis of 10 provided for 0 5 If RANGE LO RANGE HI the statuses of PV and OUT are Bad Configuration Error Then Configuration Error is output to BLOCK_ERR If there is only one main input the input is incorporated into the computation section as is not taking into account RANGE HI and RANGE LO Example Assuming that RANGE LO 20 RANGE HI 300 the following are established IN 310 IN LO 20 PV 310 IN 230 IN LO 20 g 230 20 300 20 0 75 PV 0 75 x 230 1 0 75 x 20 177 5 IN 90 IN LO 20 g 90 20 300 20 0 25 PV 0 25 x 230 1 0 25 x 20 37 5 IN 19 IN LO 10 PV 10 A4 2 2 Auxiliary Inputs There are bias and gain parameters for the IN 1 IN 2 and IN 3 auxiliary inputs The following shows the equation using them t i IN
122. SPDU transmissions message to devices which return a new PR Probe Response message 3 PTtransmission including final bit Passes a PT Pass Token message to devices included in the live list monitoring sequentially and monitors the RT Return Token and final bit returned in reply to the PT 4 CDtransmission Transmits a CD Compel Data message at the scheduled times 5 Time synchronization Supports periodic TD Time Distribution transmissions and transmissions of a reply to a CT Compel Time 6 Domain download server Sets the schedule data The schedule data can be equalized only when the Domain Download command is carried out from outside the LM in question The version of the schedule is usually monitored but no action takes place even when it changes 7 Livelist equalization Transmits SPDU messages to LMs to equalize live lists 8 LAS transfer Transfers the right of being the LAS to another LM 9 Reading writing of NMIB for LM See Section A7 5 10 Round Trip Delay Reply RR Reply to Not yet supported in the current version DLPDU 11 Long address Not yet supported in the current version IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 4 A7 5 LM Parameters A7 5 1 LM Parameter List The tables below show LM parameters Meanings of Access column entries RW read write possible R read only
123. T in Man Mode IT Block is in Man mode C 0x00002000 IT Not Scheduled IT Block is not scheduled C 0x00001000 IT Total Backup Err VALUE ease failed Last IT Output Value IT LAST F omo Toren MEE UE EET UN NN 0x00000080 AR1 in O S Mode ART Block is in O S mode C 0x00000040 ART in Man Mode ART Block is in Man mode C 0x00000020 AR1 Not Scheduled AR Block is not scheduled C 0x00000010 AR1 Range Conf Err E ail Sealer n AE C 0x00000008 AR2 in O S Mode AR2 Block is in O S mode C 0x00000004 AR2 in Man Mode AR2 Block is in Man mode C 0x00000002 AR2 Not Scheduled AR2 Block is not scheduled C 0x00000001 AR2 Range Conf Err EE T is smaller han ARa C IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 11 Device Information gt 11 3 11 2 Status of Each Parameter in Failure Mode Following tables summarize the value of FVX110 parameters when LCD display indicates an Alarm Table 11 4 Action of each parameters in failure mode Alarm Display Cause of Alarm Object Block BLOCK ERR FVX RB OOS RESOURCE block is in O S mode RB Out of Service FVX MAO1 OOS MAO1 block is in O S mode MAO1 Out of Service FVX MAO2 OOS MAC2 block is in O S mode MAO2 Out of Service IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 1 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt 12 Parameter Lists Note The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled O S Write enabled in O S mode MAN Write enabled in Man mode and O S mode AUTO Write enabled in Auto mode M
124. Tag scroll setting MAIN TAG SCROLL Y Indicator value setting INxx SCALE xx 01 to 16 Y Bar graph scaling upper limit value EU at 10095 Y Bar graph scaling Lower limit value EU at 096 Y Unit selection Units Index m Select unit displayed in the table Y Set the number of decimal places to be displayed Decimal Point Y Sub Tag display data setting A value up to 32 characters long INxx SUB TAG xx 01 to 16 lt can be set However the indicator displays only 14 characters Y Bar graph setting example Bar graph setting example Example of individual BAR_GRAPH_SELECT bar graph setting EACH_BAR_GRAPH Scroll bar setting V_SCROLL_BAR Y Scroll knob turning direction setting SCROLL DIRECTION Y Page information display setting DISP PAGE INFO Y Display cycle setting DISPLAY CYCLE lt Select from AUTO 0 5 s 1 0 s 2 0 s and 4 0 s F0708 ai Figure 7 8 Flow chart of indicator settings IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 3 8 Units the auto link function allows you to display on the
125. Value 0 0 Write Mode Definition Indicates the snapshot of RTOTAL just before a reset 27 SSP 0 0 Indicates the snapshot of TOTAL_SP just before a reset 28 INTEG_TYPE Up AUTO Integration Type Setting Value Name Description 1 UP_AUTO Counts up and is automatically reset when TOTAL_SP is reached 2 UP DEM Counts up and is reset as demanded 3 DN_AUTO Counts down and is automatically reset when 0 is reached 4 DN DEM Counts down and is reset as demanded 5 PERIODIC Counts up and is reset at periods specified in CLOCK PER 6 DEMAND Counts up and is reset as demanded 7 PER amp DEM Reset periodically or as demanded 29 INTEG OPTS 0x0004 Specifies an integration optional function bit Option Name Description 0 Input 1 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN 1 Input 2 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN 2 2 Flow forward Integrates forward flow interprets reverse flow as zero Integrates reverse flow interprets forward flow as zero Uses an input value of IN 1 or IN 2 whose status is Uncertain regarding it as a value of Good Uses an input value of IN 1 or IN 2 whose status is Bad regarding it as a value of Good Carries over an excess exceeding the threshold at reset to the next integration Note that this does not apply to UP AUTO or DN AUTO Interprets an increment as zero if the stat
126. XTENDED ACTIVE 5 4 94 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 6 4 95 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 7 4 96 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 8 4 97 FD EXTENDED MAP 1 4 98 FD EXTENDED MAP 2 4 99 FD EXTENDED MAP 3 4 100 FD EXTENDED MAP 4 4 101 FD EXTENDED MAP 5 4 102 FD EXTENDED MAP 6 4 103 FD EXTENDED MAP 7 4 104 FD EXTENDED MAP 8 4 105 PRIVATE 1 106 PRIVATE 2 107 PRIVATE 3 108 PRIVATE_4 109 PRIVATE_5 110 PRIVATE_6 111 PRIVATE_7 112 PRIVATE_8 113 PRIVATE_9 114 PRIVATE_10 115 PRIVATE_11 Total bytes 40 32 77 61 73 32 Table 6 10 View Object for Resource Block Relive Parameter Mnemonic Index 31 32 41 42 1 ST REV 2 2 2 TAG_DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT_KEY 1 5 MODE_BLK 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 7 RS_STATE 1 8 TEST_RW 9 DD_RESOURCE 10 MANUFAC_ID 4 11 DEV TYPE 2 12 DEV REV 1 13 DD REV 1 14 GRANT DENY 15 HARD TYPES 2 16 RESTART 17 FEATURES 2 18 FEATURE SEL 19 CYCLE TYPE 2 20 CYCLE SEL 21 IMN CYCLE T 4 22 MEMORY SIZE 2 23 INV CYCLE T 24 FREE SPACE 25 FREE TIME 4 26 SHED RCAS 27 SHED ROUT 28 FAULT STATE 1 29 SET FSTATE 30 CLR FSTATE 31 MAX NOTIFY 1 32 LIM NOTIFY 33 CONFIRM TIME 34 WRITE LOCK 35 UPDATE EVT 36 BLOCK ALM 37 ALARM SUM 8 38 ACK OPTION 2 39 WRITE PRI 1 40 WRITE ALM 41 ITK VER 2 42 SOFT REV 43 SOFT DESC 44 SIM ENABLE MSG 45 DEVICE STATUS 1 4 46 DEVICE STATUS 2 4 47 DEVICE_STATUS 3 4 48 DEVICE_STATUS 4 4 49 DEVICE STATUS 5 4 50 DEV
127. able operation of Fieldbus determine the operation parameters and set them to the LM devices While the parameters in Table 6 2 are to be set the worst case value of all the devices to be connected to the same Fieldbus must be used Refer to the specification of each device for details Table 6 2 lists FVX110 specification values Table 6 2 Operation Parameter Values of the FVX110 to be Set to LM Devices Symbol Parameters BEES Settings Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set maximum specification for all devices For FVX110 set a value of 4 or greater V MID Minimum Inter Minimum value of PDU Delay communication data intervals Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set the maximum specification for all devices For FVX110 set a value of 4 or greater The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded The unit is Slottime set the value so that V MRD x V ST is the maximum value of the specification for all devices For FVX110 the setting must be a value of 12 or greater and V MID V MRD x V ST V ST Slot Time V MRD Maximum Reply Delay IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 3 6 3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks The input output parameters for function blocks are combined As required they can be combined with the input of the control block The setting is written to the
128. alid connection No 10 in valid connection No 11 in valid connection No 12 in valid connection No 13 in valid connection No 14 in valid connection No 15 in valid connection No 16 in valid connection o xoo2zomw 15 2015 NO OF VALID CON Indicates how many of the 16 inputs are valid Corresponds to the denominator when DISP PAGE INFO is displayed 16 2016 VALID CON SUMMARY OxFFFF Sets which of the 16 inputs are valid inputs 17 2017 MAC CON SUMMARY 0x0000 Indicates which of the 16 inputs gets MAO block values 18 19 2018 2019 ISEL CON SUMMARY SIM CON SUMMARY 0x0000 OxFFFF AUTO Indicates which of the 16 inputs gets IS block values Indicates which of the 16 inputs gets Simulation state values 20 2020 BAR GRAPH SELECT 0 AUTO Use to specify whether bar graphs should be displayed in the lower field of the LCD 16 input batch setting 21 2021 EACH BAR GRAPH 0x0000 AUTO Use to specify whether bar graphs should be displayed in the lower field of the LCD Each input batch setting 22 2022 MAIN TAG SCROLL AUTO Use to set the character scroll function for MAIN TAG infor mation 0 scroll function Off 7 scroll function On 23 2023 V SCROLL BAR AUTO Use to turn the vertical scroll bar on and off 0 Scroll bar display function Off 1 Scroll bar display function On 2 On only during di
129. an mode and O S mode 12 1 Resource Block Relative Index Index 1000 Parameter Name Block Header Factory Default TAG7RS Explanation Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Revision Execution Time etc 1001 ST REV The revision level of the static data associated with the resource block The revision value is incremented each time a static parameter value in this block is changed 1002 TAG DESC Null The user description of the intended application of the block 1003 STRATEGY The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 1004 ALERT KEY The identification number of the plant unit This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms etc 1005 MODE BLK The actual target permitted and normal modes of the block 1006 BLOCK ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 1007 RS STATE State of the resource block state machine 1008 TEST RW Null Read write test parameter used only for conformance testing and simulation 1009 DD RESOURCE Null String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for this resource 10 1010 MANUFAC ID 0x00594543 Manufacturer identificati
130. an or equal to 5nF and 20uH respectively In each N I Fieldbus segment only one active Source normally the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the Fieldbus system The allowed voltage Uo Voc or Vt of the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus used to supply the bus cable must be limited to the range 14Vdc to 17 5Vdc All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energy to the System except a leakage current of 50 pA for each connected device Separately powered equipment needs galvanic isolation to ensure the nonincendive field wiring Fieldbus circuit remains passive IM 01S01C01 01EN Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance R 15 150 O km Inductance per unit length L 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length C 45 200 nF km C C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating or C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line Length of spur cable max 60 m Length of trunk cable max 1 km Group IIC or 5 km Group IIB Length of splice max 1m Terminators At the end of each trunk cable an FM Approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 100 Q C 0 2 2 mF 2 8 2 CSA Certification a CSAExplosionproof Type Caution for CSA explo
131. apability values in all the devices within the segment An example is shown below DImeBasiclnfo FVX110 Index 374 SM Subindex Element SlotTime 4 MaxResponseDelay 3 FVX110 Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Description Capability value for V ST Capability value for V MRD MinInterPduDelay 4 Capability value for V MID In this case set SlotTime MaxResponseTime and MinInterPduDelay as follows ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord FVX110 Index 385 SM Subindex Element Setting Default Description 1 SlotTime 20 4095 V ST 3 MaxResponseDelay 6 5 V MRD 6 MinInterPduDelay 12 12 V MID 3 In the LAS settings of the FVX110 set the values of V FUN and V NUN so that they include the node addresses of all nodes within the same segment See also Figure A7 3 ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord FVX110 Index 385 SM Subindex Element Default Value Description 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 0x25 V FUN 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld OxBA V NUN A7 4 LM Functions No Function Description 1 LM initialization When a fieldbus segment starts the LM with the smallest V ST x V TN value within the segment becomes the LAS At all times each LM is checking whether or not a carrier is on the segment 2 Startup of other nodes PN and Node Transmits a PN Probe Node message and Node Activation SPDU Activation
132. arameters for FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator Table 5 2 YOKOGAWA device DTM for FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator Device Fyx110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator DTM Model Device Device Name W s Name Type Revision FVX FF FVX DTM FVX110 09010 1 N NOTE For more information on FieldMate refer to the User s Manual IM 01R01A01 1E Versatile Device Management Wizard lt 5 Installation gt 5 6 5 10 Continuous Record of Values If the host has a function that continuously records the indications use this function to list the indications values Depending on the host being used it may be necessary to set the schedule of Publish the function that transmits the indication on a periodic basis 5 11 Generation of Alarm Generation of an alarm can be attempted from FVX110 Block alarm Output limit alarm and Update alarm are informed to the host When generating alarm a Link Object and a VCR Static Entry need to be set For details of Link Object and VCR Static Entry refer to section 6 6 1 Link object and section 6 5 1 VCR Setting IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 1 6 Configuration This chapter describes how to adapt the function and performance of the FVX110 to suit specific applications Because multiple devices are connected to Fieldbus it is important to carefully consider the device requirements and settings when configuring the system The following steps must b
133. ate of increase limit and rate of decrease limit Setpoint High Low Limits Avalue larger than the value of SP HI LIM cannot be set for SP Avalue smaller than the value of SP LO LIM cannot be set for SP Setpoint Rate Limits The setpoint rate limits are used to restrict the magnitude of changes in the SP value so as to change the SP value gradually towards a new setpoint Anincrease of the SP value at each execution period period of execution in the Block Header is limited to the value of SP RATE UP Adecrease of the SP value at each execution period period of execution in the Block Header is limited to the value of SP RATE DOWN A5 11 2 When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas Mode By selecting Obey SP Limits if Cas or RCas in CONTROL OPTS see Section A5 13 the setpoint high low limits can be put into force also when the value of MODE BLK is Cas or RCas IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 8 A5 12 External output Tracking External tracking is an action of outputting the value of the remote output TRK_VAL set from outside the PID block as illustrated in the figure below External tracking is performed when the block mode is LO TRK_VAL TRK_SCALE OUT_SCALE PID control computation result L o b FA0504 ai To change the block mode to LO 1 Select Track Enable in CONTROL_OPTS 2 Set TRK_IN_D to true However to change the block mode from Man to LO Track in Manua
134. ation in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 83 2083 INO6 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 6 1000 2 84 2084 INO7 MAIN TAG PD Tag07 Use to set the Main Tag for input 7 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 85 2085 INO7 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 7 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 86 2086 INO7 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 7 1000 2 87 2087 INO8B MAIN TAG PD Tag08 Use to set the Main Tag for input 8 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 88 2088 INO8 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 8 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 89 2089 INO8 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for di
135. ation no TYPE Value Selection Name Description 1 Flow Flow compensation compensation linear linear 2 Flow Flow compensation compensation square root square root 3 Flow Flow compensation compensation approximate approximate expression 4 BTU flow Quantity of heat calculation 5 Traditional Multiply Multiplication and Divide division 6 Average Average calculation 7 Traditional summer Summation 8 Fourth order Ath order auxiliary Polynomial Type 1 input polynomial computation 9 HTG level HTG level compensation compensation 10 Fourth order Ath order main Polynomial Type 2 input polynomial computation BTU stands for British thermal unit HTG stands for hydrostatic tank gauging 30 17530 17630 BAL_TIME More 0 4 Time taken to return to the set value than 0 31 17531 17631 BIAS 0 4 Bias value used to calculate the output 32 17532 17632 GAIN 1 4 Gain value used to calculate the output 33 17533 17633 OUT_HI_ INF 4 Maximum output value LIM 34 17534 17634 OUT_LO_ INF 4 Minimum output value LIM 35 17535 17635 UPDATE_ Indicates event information if an update event EVT setting change occurs 36 17536 17636 BLOCK_ Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs ALM IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 1 Appendix 5 PID Block APID block performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value PV fro
136. ation when input 6 is in the fault state 6 Fault state to value 7 Operation when input 7 is in the fault state 7 Fault state to value 8 Operation when input 8 is in the fault state 8 Use fault state value on restart 1 Operation when input 1 is in the fault state at restart 9 Use fault state value on restart 2 Operation when input 2 is in the fault state at restart 10 Use fault state value on restart 3 Operation when input 3 is in the fault state at restart 11 Use fault state value on restart A Operation when input 4 is in the fault state at restart 12 Use fault state value on restart 5 Operation when input 5 is in the fault state at restart 13 Use fault state value on restart 6 Operation when input 6 is in the fault state at restart 14 Use fault state value on restart 7 Operation when input 7 is in the fault state at restart 15 Use fault state value on restart 8 Operation when input 8 is in the fault state at restart Use Fault state to value 1 Fault state to value 8 to set fault state operation either to transfer the value prior to fault state status to LCD Transducer Block 0 freeze or to transfer FSTATE VAL 1 FSTATE VAL 8 to LCD Transducer Block 1 present When the Use fault state value on restart 1 Use fault state value on restart 8 bit is on values set by FSTATE_ VAL 1 FSTATE VAL 8 are used as default values at restart When this bit is not on the value stored in IN 1 IN 8 prior to restart is used as the
137. ative control actions in response to changes of characteristics in the controlled process changes in load and occurrences of disturbances In Cas mode PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the PI D control algorithm is employed in order to obtain better performance against the changes in the setpoint The algorithm is automatically switched by the block according to the mode A basic form of each algorithm is expressed in the equation below I PD Control Algorithm in Auto RCas mode AMVn K APVn 2 PVn SPn 15 A APVn PI D Control Algorithm in Cas mode AMVn K A PVn SPn ar PVn SPn Td lt gt A APVn Where AMVn change in control output APVn change in measured controlled value PVn PVn 1 AT control period period of execution in Block Header K proportional gain GAIN 100 proportional band Ti integral time RESET Td derivative time RATE The subscripts n and n 1 represent the time of sampling such that PVn and PVn 1 denote the PV value sampled most recently and the PV value sampled at the preceding control period respectively A5 4 2 PID Control Parameters The table below shows the PID control parameters Parameter Description Valid Range GAIN Proportional gain 0 05 to 20 RESET Integral time 0 1 to 10 000 seconds RATE Derivative time 0 to infinity seconds A5 5 Control Output The final control output
138. atus must be Factory Mutual Research Approved under FISCO Concept Note 5 Associated Apparatus manufacturer s installa tion drawing must be followed when installing this equipment Note 6 No revision to drawing without prior Factory Mutual Research Approval Note 7 Terminator must be FM Approved Note 8 Note a warning label worded SUBSTITU TION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY and INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE DOC NO IFM040 A11 Pi to P 6 Electrical Data Rating 1 Entity For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 24 V Maximum Input Current Imax 250 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 1 2 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH Rating 2 FISCO For Groups A B C D E F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 500 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 5 5 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH Rating 3 FISCO For Groups C D E F and G or Group IIB Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 500 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 5 5 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 1 76 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 5 Note In the rating 1 the output current of the barrier must be limited by a resistor Ra such that lo Uo Ra In the rating 2 or 3 the output characteristic
139. bes OUT processing Table A3 3 Block Mode and Value MODE O S Man Value The previous value is output At startup the initial value is used Writable the operator may change the value Value specified by MIN_Good gt the number of The previous value is output valid inputs Not writable If there is no valid input If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS OPTS is set If the value of OP SELECT is greater than 8 Zero which is the maximum number of inputs Not writable If OP SELECT is enabled The value of the selected input is output Not writable If the value is out of the SELECT TYPE setting The previous value is output range when the value of OP SELECT is 0 Not writable If SELECT TYPE is First Good The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is output A Not writable u IfSELECT TYPE is MINIMUM The minimum value among the values of the valid inputs is t output o Not writable If SELECT_TYPE is MAXIMUM The maximum value among the values of the valid inputs is output Not writable IFSELECT TYPE is MIDDLE Because two inputs are positioned in the middle of the values There is an even multiple number of valid inputs of even multiple valid inputs the average of the
140. cator or its external wiring the indicator may be affected by high frequency noise pickup To test this start out from a distance of several meters and slowly approach the indicator with the transceiver while observing the measurement loop for noise effects Thereafter use the transceiver outside the range where the noise effects were first Observed 2 7 Insulation Resistance and Dielectric Strength Test Since the indicator has undergone insulation resistance and dielectric strength tests at the factory before shipment normally these tests are not required If the need arises to conduct these tests heed the following a Do not perform such tests more frequently than is absolutely necessary Even test voltages that do not cause visible damage to the insulation may degrade the insulation and reduce safety margins b Never apply a voltage exceeding 500 V DC 100 V DC with an internal lightning protector for the insulation resistance test nor a voltage exceeding 500 V AC 100 V AC with an internal lightning protector for the dielectric strength test c Before conducting these tests disconnect all signal lines from the indicator terminals The procedure for conducting these tests is as follows Insulation Resistance Test 1 Short circuit the and SUPPLY terminals in the terminal box 2 Turn OFF the insulation tester Then connect the insulation tester plus lead wire to the shorted SUPPLY terminals and the
141. ccurrence of either of the following errors values setin BLOCK ERR and notifies the content of BLOCK ERR HEGCK ER Condition Local Override MODE BLK actual of PID block is LO Input Failure IN status of the PID block is either of the following Bad Device Failure Bad Sensor Failure Out of Service MODE BLK target of the PID block is O S A5 18 2 Process Alarms There are six types of process alarms Priority level can be set to process alarms The priority level is set for each process alarm type Parameter Process Containing Alarm Cause of Occurrence Priority Level Setting HI HI ALM Occurs when the PV HI HI PRI increases above the HI HI LIM value HI ALM Occurs when the PV HI PRI increases above HI LIM value LO ALM Occurs when the PV LO PRI decreases below the LO LIM value LO LO Occurs when the PV LO LO LIM ALM decreases below the LO LO LIM value DV HI ALM Occurs when the value of DV HI PRI PV SP increases above the DV HI LIM value DV LO Occurs when the value DV LO PRI ALM of PV SP decreases below the DV LO LIM value A5 19 Example of Block Connections Al PID r gt BKCAL_IN OUT CAS_IN AO BKCAL_OUT FA0506 ai When configuring a simple PID control loop by combining an field device with a fieldbus valve positioner that contains an AO block follow the procedur
142. ched to FVX110 If no FVX110 is detected check the available address range and the polarity of the power supply If the node address and PD tag are not specified when ordering default value is factory set If two or more FVX110s are connected at a time with default value only one FVX110 will be detected from the host as FVX110 have the same initial address Separately connect each FVX110 and set a different address for each IM 01S01C01 01EN 5 8 Integration of DD If the host supports DD Device Description the DD of the FVX110 needs to be installed Check if host has the following directory under its default DD directory 594543 0010 594543 is the manufacturer number of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and 0010 is the FVX110 device number respectively If this directory is not found the DD of the FVX110 has not been included Create the above directory and copy the DD file Om0n ffo OmOn sym m n is a numeral into the directory Om in the file name shows the device revision and On shows the DD revision If you do not have the DD or capabilities files you can download them from our web site http www yokogawa com fld Once the DD is installed in the directory the name and attribute of all parameters of the FVX110 are displayed Off line configuration is possible by using capabilities files 5 9 Setthe Parameters Using DTM Following Device DTM on YOKOGAWA FieldMate can be used to configure the p
143. come the LAS However a request of writing true to this parameter in a device is rejected if the value of the same parameter in any other device that has a smaller node address within the same segment is true 4 LiveListStatusArrayVariable A 32 byte variable in which each bit represents the status of whether a device on the same segment is live or not The leading bit corresponds to the device address 0x00 and final bit to OxFF The value of LiveListStatusArrayVariable in the case where devices having the addresses 0x10 and 0x15 in the fieldbus segment is shown below 0x00 00 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bit correspondences 0 0000000000 0x00 000001000010 0 0x10 0x15 5 MaxTokenHoldTimeArray An 8 64 byte array variable in which each set of 2 bytes represents the delegation time set as an octet time assigned to a device The delegation time denotes a time period that is given to a device by means of a PT message sent from the LAS within each token circulation cycle The leading 2 bytes correspond to the device address 0x00 and the final 2 bytes to the device address OxFF Specify the subindex to access this parameter 6 BootOperatFunctionalClass Writing 1 to this parameter in a device and restarting the device causes the device to start as a basic device On the contrary writing 2 to this parameter and restarting the device causes the device
144. compensation square root func PV x f f sqrt t 1 t 2 t 3 3 Flow compensation approximate expression func PV x f f sqrt t_1 x t_2 x t_3 x t_3 4 Quantity of heat calculation func PV x f f t 1 t 2 5 Multiplication and division func PV x f f t 1 t 2 t 3 6 Average calculation func PV t 1 t 2 t 3 N where N number of inputs 7 Summation func PV t_1 t_2 t3 8 Polynomial computation func PV t_12 t_23 t_34 9 HTG level compensation func PV t_1 PV t_2 10 Polynomial computation func PV GAIN_IN_1 x PV2 GAIN IN 2 x PV3 GAIN_IN_3 x PV4 Precaution for computation Division by 0 If a value is divided by 0 the calculation result is interpreted as 1037 and depending with core a plus sign is added to it Negative square root The square root of an absolute value is extracted and a minus sign is added to it A4 4 Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block A4 3 2 Compensated Values In computing equations 1 to 5 in A4 3 1 the value f is restricted by the COMP HI LIM or COMP LO LIM parameter In this case the value f is treated as follows If P gt COMP HI LIM f COMP HI UM If f lt COMP LO LIM f COMP LO UM A4 3 3 Average Calculation In computing equation 6 in A4 3 1 the average of input value is calculated Here it is necessary to obtain the number of inputs N For this determination is made to see if the sub status of each input
145. condition optional setting 24 FSTATE_VAL7 0 A value transferred as input 7 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 25 FSTATE_VAL8 0 A value transferred as input 8 to LCD Transducer Block during fault state condition optional setting 26 FSTATE_STATUS 0 2 List of inputs that have transitioned to fault state status 27 UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information when an event update a change in set values occurs 28 BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information when a block alarm occurs IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 1 Appendix 7 Link Master Functions AT7 1 Link Active Scheduler Alink active scheduler LAS is a deterministic centralized bus scheduler that can control communications on an H1 fieldbus segment There is only one LAS on an H1 fieldbus segment An FVX110 supports the following LAS functions PN transmission Identifies a fieldbus device newly connected to the same fieldbus segment PN is short for Probe Node PT transmission Passes a token governing the right to transmit to a fieldbus device on the same segment PT is short for Pass Token e CD transmission Carry out a scheduled transmission to a fieldbus device on the same segment CD is short for Compel Data Time synchronization Periodically transmits the time data to all fieldbus devices on the segment and returns the time data in response to a request from a device e Live list equalization
146. ctory unless otherwise specified To change only the node address clear the address once and then set a new node address To set the PD Tag first clear the node address and clear the PD Tag then set the PD Tag and node address again Devices whose node addresses have been cleared will have the default address randomly chosen from a range of 248 to 251 or from hexadecimal F8 to FB At the same time it is necessary to specify the device ID in order to correctly specify the device The device ID of the FVX110 is 594543001 Oxxxxxxxx The xxxxxxxx at the end of the above device ID is a total of 8 alohanumeric characters 6 5 Communication Setting To set the communication function it is necessary to change the database residing in SM VFD 6 5 1 VCR Setting Set VCR Virtual Communication Relationship which specifies the called party for communication and resources FVX110 has 35 VCRs whose application can be changed except for the first VCR which is used for management FVX110 has VCRs of four types Server QUB VCR A Server responds to requests from a host This communication needs data exchange This type of communication is called QUB Queued User triggered Bidirectional VCR Source QUU VCR A Source multicasts alarms or trends to other devices This type of communication is called QUU Queued User triggered Unidirectional VCR Publisher BNU VCR A Publisher multicasts Al block output of field device to ano
147. d cycle of communication icon flashing When set to AUTO displaying cycle listed above are automatically set according to ambient temperature where FVX110 installed 10 C is the border of temperature Displaying cycle is listed in Table 7 3 N NOTE When the ambient temperature where FVX110 installed is very low Please set the DISPLAY CYCLE to AUTO or more than 2 0 sec N NOTE Please don t charge DISPLAY CYCLE setting during squawk It will be cause of stopping squawk indication Table 7 3 Screen displaying cycle Seting of DISPLAY CYCLE 0 Auto Ambient 1 2 3 4 Temperature 0 5sec 1 0sec 2 0sec 4 0sec gt sS 10 C 10 C Object Parameter Setting Time Scan mode 0 5 sec 5sec 0 5 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec Flashing BEE comm 1sec 10sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Signal Display cycle of lower field 1 sec 5sec 0 5sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 0 25 Main Tag Scrolling speed MAIN TAG SCROLL 1 Active DS Deech 0 5sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec jis scroll starting time ctm 2 sec 10 sec 1sec 2sec 4sec 8sec 1 Active 0 5 sec 5sec 0 5sec 1 sec 2sec 4 sec Scroll bar moving speed Display out time for 2 Knob V SCROLL BAR link 2 Knob link 4 sec 5 sec 4sec 4 sec 4 sec 4 sec Display cycle of SQUAWK 1 Squawk 0 5 sec 5sec 0 5 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec Squawk Display action after backlight off DISP QUIET MODE _ 1 Turn page cyclic 1 sec 5sec 0 5 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec Di
148. d when an abnormal condition in field device is detected By Resource Block Check Alarm Failure Alarm Maintenance Alarm and off specification Alarm IM 01S01C01 01EN An alert has following structure Table 9 1 Subindex t E lt D 3 Explanation 2 o o S maso 2 59 8958 Q 5 iira Index of block from which alert is generated Alert Key copied from the block Type of the alert Alert Name identified by manufacturer specific DD Reason of alert notification Priority of the alarm Time when this alert is first detected Enumerated cause of this alert Value of referenced data Relative index of referenced data Value of static revision ST REV of the block 11 Unit code of referenced data Relative index of the block that triggered the alert 9 In Process Operation 9 2 9 2 3 Standard categories for NAMUR NE 107 instrument diagnostics alarms The following standard categories of instrument diagnostics are defined for the NAMUR NE 107 F Failed An alarm category that indicates a failure has occurred in the instrument or in its peripheral devices C Check Function An alarm category that indicates that a detected failure is a temporary event S Off Specification An alarm category that indicates that the detected failure was caused by the instrument being used outside of its range or because a discrepancy
149. d write impossible Get OD possible 391 DOMAIN 2 Read write impossible Get OD possible IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 6 A7 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameters The following describes LM parameters of an FVX110 NOTE Do not turn off the power to the FVX110 for 60 seconds after making a change to its parameter settings 1 DimeLinkMasterCapabilitiesVariable E Meaning Description Value B3 0x04 LAS Whether the LAS schedule Schedule in can 71 or cannot 20 be 4 Non volatile saved to the non volatile Memory memory B2 0x02 Last Values Whether to support 1 Record or not to support 0 0 Supported LastValuesRecord B1 0x01 Link Master Whether to support 1 Statistics or not to support 0 Record DimeLinkMasterStatisticsRecord 0 Supported 2 DimeLinkMasterinfoRecord Sub Size Descrip index Element bytes tion j 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 1 V MSO 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 2 V DMDT 3 DefTokenHoldTime 2 V DTHT 4 TargetTokenRotTime 2 V TTRT 5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 2 V LTHT 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 4 V TDP 7 MaximumlnactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 V MICD 8 LLasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 2 V LDDP 3 PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable Explicitly declares the LAS Writing true OxFF to this parameter in a device causes that device to attempt to be
150. dapter Flexible metal conduit Wiring metal conduit Tee Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads for waterproofing Drain plug F0503 ai Figure 5 3 Typical Cable Wiring Using Flameproof Packing Adapter IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 5 Installation gt 5 3 m Flameproof metal conduit wiring 5 5 Connection of Devices Aseal fitting must be installed near the terminal box connection port for a sealed construction Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads of the terminal box connection port flexible metal conduit and seal fitting for waterproofing Flameproof flexible metal conduit Non hazardous area Flameproof heavy gauge steel conduit Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads of these fittings for Drain plug waterproofing Seal fitting After wiring impregnate the ek with a compound to seal tubing F0504 ai Figure 5 4 Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal s Conduit 5 4 Grounding Grounding is always required for the proper operation of indicator Follow the domestic electrical requirements as regulated in each country For a indicator with a built in lightning protector grounding should satisfy ground resistance of 100 or less Ground terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal box Either of these terminals may be used Terminal box Ground terminal inside Ground terminal p adi outside Figure 5 5 Ground Termi
151. dated when set values are changed This parameter is used to check for parameter changes 2 TAG DESC Null A universal parameter intended for storing comments describing tag data 3 STRATEGY 0 2 The strategy field is a universal parameter used by a high level system to identify function blocks 4 ALERT KEY 1 255 0 1 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred Generally this is a universal parameter used by a high level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only 5 MODE BLK 4 4 A universal parameter that represents block operating condition It comprises the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 6 BLOCK ERR M len 2 2 Indicates error status of the MAO function block The following bits are used by the MAO function block bit1 Block Configuration Error bit 4 LO mode bit 15 O S mode 7 CHANNEL O S 1 2 A means for theoretically accessing LCD Transducer Block It cannot be used on the FVX110 8 IN 1 0 5 5 This is an input input 1 for the MAO function block 9 IN 2 0 5 5 This is an input input 2 for the MAO function block IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block gt A6 5 pay Parameter We A wg ee Es Description Remarks
152. dd multiple valid signals are configured Application of the block is to supply a selected control signal in the forward path The SELECTED parameter is the 2nd output indicating which input has been selected using the algorithm IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 3 A3 2 Input Section A3 2 1 Mode Handling The Input Selector block s operations are determined by the mode parameter name MODE BLK The following describes operations in each mode Supported Mode Role O S System stopped status Out of Service Allows you to make changes to configuration Man f you do not want to output the value and status from IN or if the value or status thus output is not preferable you can manually transmit the value to OUT Auto Automatic system operation status Valid Input When the following conditions are satisfied the value of IN n becomes valid 1 The QUALITY in each status of IN n is either Good NC Good C or Uncertain 3 2 The values of DISABLE n corresponding to each IN n are OFF and the QUALITY in the status of which is either Good NC Good C or Uncertain 1 2 3 The number of inputs that are good is greater than the value of MIN GOOD 4 Note 1 Uncertain is applicable when Use Uncertain as Good is selected in the STATUS OPTS parameter 2 Ifthe status of DISABLE n is Bad or Uncertain its quality is lower so that the status of IN n is
153. default value after restart The status of inputs in fault state status transitions from Bad No comm with LUV Const or Bad No comm no LUV Const Refer to Appendix 6 4 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block gt A6 4 A6 4 Status Transitions Note that inputs IN 1 IN 8 status are not transferred to LCD Transducer Block as is when the following Settings are made Setting Status transition high level system priority When MAO function block is in O S mode Bad Out of Service No Limit When fault state to value x 0 freeze x 1 to 8 Bad No comm with LUV Const When fault state to value x 1 present x 1 to 8 Bad No comm no LUV Const When no output is connected to IN 1 IN 8 Bad Not Connected No Limit Bad Configuration Error received limit gt The MAO function block CHANNEL is 0 S EE Bi received limit Same as IN 1 IN 8 status Something other than the above Same as IN 1 IN 8 status A6 5 Parameter list display Relative Write Valid Initial View Index Parameter Mode Range Value 4 9 3 4 Description Remarks 0 BLOCK_HEADER Block Displays Block Tag DD Revision Execution Time Tag and other MAO function block information O S 1 STREV J jj 2 2 2 2 Describes the revision level of parameters for setting the MAO function block The revision is up
154. der to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 7T 2077 INO4 SCALE 100 0 AUTO Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 4 1000 2 78 2078 INO5 MAIN TAG PD Tag05 AUTO Use to set the Main Tag for input 5 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 79 2079 INO5 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT AUTO Use the Sub Tag for input 5 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 80 2080 INO5 SCALE 100 0 AUTO Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 5 1000 2 IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 9 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt joda Index Parameter Name Factory Default us Explanation 81 2081 INOG MAIN TAG PD Tag06 Use to set the Main Tag for input 6 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 82 2082 INOG SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 6 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG inform
155. down and do not cover custom made instruments Please note that changes in the specifications construction or component parts of the instrument may not immediately be reflected in this manual at the time of change provided that postponement of revisions will not cause difficulty to the user from a functional or performance standpoint Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for this product except as stated in the warranty Ifthe customer or any third party is harmed by the use of this product Yokogawa assumes no responsibility for any such harm owing to any defects in the product which were not predictable or for any indirect damages The following safety symbols are used in this manual A WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices A IMPORTANT Indicates that operating the hardware or software in this manner may damage it or lead to system failure AA NOTE Draws attention to information essential for understanding the operation and features Direct current 1 4 Safe Use of This Product For the safety of the operator and to protect the instrument and the system please be sure to follow this manual s safety instructions when handling this inst
156. e below to make the settings of the corresponding fieldbus function blocks 1 Connect the Al block and PID block of the field device and the AO block of the valve positioner as shown above 2 Set MODE BLK target of the PID block to O S and then set GAIN RESET and RATE to appropriate values 3 Check that the value of MODE BLK actual of the Al block is Auto 4 Set MODE BLK target of the AO block to CAS AUTO meaning Cas and Auto 5 Check that the value of BKCAL_IN status of the PID block is not Bad 6 Check that the value of IN status of the PID block is not Bad 7 Check that Auto is set in MODE BLK permitted of the PID block 8 Set MODE BLK target of the PID block to Auto When finishing all steps in order the PID block and AO block exchange the respective information and initialize the cascade connection Consequently the value of MODE BLK actual of the PID block changes to Auto and automatic PID control starts IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 11 A5 20 View Object for PID Function Block Relative Parameter l nemenie VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW Index 1 2 3 4 52 LO PRI 1 53 LO_LIM 4 54 LO LO PRI 1 55 LO LO LIM 4 56 DV HI PRI 1 57 DV HI UM 4 58 DV LO PRI 1 59 DV LO LIM 4 60 HL H ALM ei HLALM 62 LO ALM 63 LO LO ALM 64 DV H ALM 65 DV LO ALM Totals 43 43 83 104
157. e display Valid input values VALID CON SUMMARY Select valid IN xx xx 01 16 to indicate in LCD at VALID CON SUMMARY IN xx which is not chosen at VALID CON SUMMARY will not indicated in LCD This setting is reflected to the MAO CON SUMMARY ISEL CON SUMMARY and the SIM CON SUMMARY 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 4 Main Tag settings INxx MAIN TAG The Main Tag is a memo field for making settings used for entering the most important information to identify the indicating field instrument for example a PD TAG of field instrument Setting can be done in INxx MAIN TAG xx 01 to 16 Maximum of 32 characters can be set but 14 characters are limit of indication on LCD Scroll to view the digits beyond the first 14 digits Use MAIN TAG SCROLL to set the scroll Main Tag F0702 ai Figure 7 2 A NOTE 8 characters are allowed if page information have set to enable To set MAIN TAG SCROLL 1 Active it is possible to view information exceeding the allowed number of characters through scrolling Main Tag settings Indicator setting INxx SCALE Use INxx_SCALE xx 01 to 16 to set measuring units bar graph scaling and the number of decimal point digits of display values Scaling is normally setto the same value as the field instrument measurement range Set the upper limit and lower limit values in EU at 100 and EU at 0 Scaling is not a mandatory setting but is required to enable display of bar graphs 3939
158. e rate of change when the PID block is in Auto mode External output tracking Performs the scaling of the value of TRK_VAL to the range of the OUT and outputs it as the OUT Mode change Changes the block mode between 8 modes O S IMan LO Man Auto Cas RCas ROut Bumpless transfer Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode and at switching of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block Initialization and manual Changes the block mode to IMan and suspends the control action when the specified condition is met fallback Manual fallback Changes the block mode to Man and aborts the control action Auto fallback Changes the block mode to Auto when it is Cas and continues the control action with the setpoint set by the operator Mode shedding upon Changes the block mode in accordance with the SHED_OPT setting upon a computer failure computer failure Alarm processing Generates block alarms and process alarms and performs event updates IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt A5 2 A5 3 Parameters of PID Block NOTE In the table below the Write column shows the modes in which the respective parameters can be written A blank in the Write column indicates that the corresponding parameter can be written in all modes of the PID block Adash indicates that the corresponding parameter cannot be written in any mode
159. e resource block must be returned to its factory default In the factory default setting Hard W Lock bit 4 is 0 Off and Soft W Lock bit 3 is 1 On Table 9 5 FEATURE SEL write lock switch and WRITE LOCK parameter relationship FEATURE SEL Write Hard Soft lock WRITE LOCK W W Switch Lock Lock bit4 bit3 d Unavailable OFF 1 7 Write lock Sg Disabled disabled OFF 1 Write lock disabled 1 ON Factory default 2 Write lock enabled S Unavailable 1 ON OFF Enabled depends on write lock switch When Hard W Lock and Soft W Lock are both 1 On the Hard W Lock setting takes precedence and Soft W Lock is automatically set to O Off Amplifier Assembly 2 m Jg lt OFF during operation WRITE LOCK F0905 ai Figure 9 5 WRITE LOCK Switch IM 01S01C01 01EN 10 1 lt 10 Maintenance gt 10 Maintenance 10 1 Overview Maintenance of the indicator is easy due to its modular construction This chapter describes the procedures for the disassembly and reassembly procedures required for component replacement Indicators are precision instruments Please carefully and thoroughly read the following sections for information on how to properly handle them while performing maintenance AA IMPORTANT Asarule maintenance of this indicator should be done in a shop that has all the necessary tools The CPU assembly
160. e taken 1 Network design Determines the devices to be connected to Fieldbus and checks the capacity of the power supply 2 Network definition Determines the tag and node addresses for all devices 3 Definition of combining function blocks Determines how function blocks are combined 4 Setting tags and addresses Sets the PD Tag and node addresses for each device 5 Communication setting Sets the link between communication parameters and function blocks 6 Block setting Sets the parameters for function blocks The following section describes in sequence each step of this procedure The use of a dedicated configuration tool significantly simplifies this procedure Refer to Appendix 7 when the FVX110 is used as Link Master 6 1 Network Design Select the devices to be connected to the Fieldbus network The following are essential for the operation of Fieldbus Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices including the host Conventional DC current cannot be used as this Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators Refer to the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host Field devices Connect the field devices necessary for instrumentation The FVX110 has passed the interoperability test conducted by The Fieldbus Foundation In order
161. e use of an input value switches the range and determines the PV status Computation section Makes calculations through ARITH TYPE Output section Applies gain multiplication and bias addition to the calculated result to perform limitation processing for output Therange extension function compensates the IN and IN LO input values when two devices with different ranges are connected to make smooth input switching IM 01S01C01 01EN A4 2 Input Section There are five inputs IN and IN_LO main inputs and IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 auxiliary inputs IN and IN_LO are intended to connect devices with different measurement ranges and allow the use of switching a measurement range by selecting the measuring device However because there are slight differences between IN and IN LO values even when the same item is measured instantaneous switching causes abrupt changes in the output To prevent this phenomenon the Arithmetic block uses a function known as range extension to compensate the IN and IN LO values between RANGE HI and RANGE LO This enables the input to be switched smoothly The result of the RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION is substituted into PV to be used for calculations A4 2 4 Main Inputs The RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION determines the PV value in the following order 1 If IN gt RANGE HI gt PV IN 2 If INS RANGE_LO PV IN LO 3 IFRANGE HI gt IN gt RANGE LO PV g x IN 1 g x IN LO g IN RANGE LO
162. earing the Active status if the subcode has changed 9f 1037 ALARM SUM Enable The current alert status unacknowledged states unreported states and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block 38 1038 ACK OPTION OxFFFF Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 39 1039 WRITE PRI 0 Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock 40 1040 WRITE ALM This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared 41 1041 ITK VER 5 Version number of interoperability test by Fieldbus Foundation applied to FVX110 42 1042 SOFT REV FVX110 software revision number 43 1043 SOFT DESC Yokogawa internal use 44 1044 SIM ENABLE MG Null Software switch for simulation function 45 1045 DEVICE STATUS 1 0 Device status For details refer to Table 11 1 46 1046 DEVICE STATUS 2 0 Device status For details refer to Table 11 2 47 1047 DEVICE STATUS 3 0 Device status For details refer to Table 11 3 48 1048 DEVICE STATUS A reserve FVX110 does not support this 49 1049 DEVICE STATUS 5 reserve FVX110 does not support this 50 1050 DEVICE STATUS 6 _ reserve FVX110 does not support this 51 1051 DEVICE STATUS 7 reserve FVX110 does not support this 52 1052 DEVICE STATUS 8 reserve FVX110 does not support this 53 1053 SOFTDWN_ 0x01 AUTO Defines whether to accept software downloads PROTECT 0x01 Unprotected 0x02
163. eeseoccascencncsecsacecaantecnceeesnesenaeeeeneees A5 7 A5 11 Setpoint Bt CT A5 7 A5 11 1 When PID Block Is in Auto Mode ssssnessnesneennssrnssreernerrnnrrnsrnere A5 7 A5 11 2 When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas Mode A5 7 A5 12 External output Tracking eese nnne nennen A5 8 A5 13 Measured value Tracking eese nnne nnns A5 8 A5 14 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan eene A5 8 A5415 Manual FallBack ees A5 9 A516 Auto Fallback i ssiccccsceccsecccsceccchceccsadetsceescatecndecacacncasstecsdacanaexsantessteccsaceensneesanies A5 9 A5 17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure sues A5 9 ASG SHED OP Th inicr he Fa e eg a a e e e e ee es A5 9 ENT WE Vi A5 10 A5 18 1 Block Alarm BLOCK_ALM c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeneaees A5 10 A5 18 2 Process Alarms sss A5 10 A5 19 Example of Block Connections esent A5 10 A5 20 View Object for PID Function BIOCK ccscescseseeeseeeseeenseeneneseneneneneneneees A5 11 Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block A6 1 A6 1 FunctioniBlock Diagram iere aeieea NENE SENEESE SERANTES A6 1 A6 2 Block MOG c M A6 2 A6 3 liej ct M A6 3 A6 3 1 Trans
164. en adjuk ki Amennyiben helyi nyelven k rik az Ex eszk z k le r sait k rj k keress k fel a legk zelebbi Yokogawa irod t vagy k pviseletet Bcnykn ynbTBaHna 3a NpoAYyKTU or cepnata ATEX Ex ce npegnaraT Ha aHrTM CKM HEMCKN M dpencku eawk AKO ce Hyxgaere OT yrreTBaHus 3a nponykrM or cepnaTa Ex Ha poriuusi BM 3K ce cBepxere c Halt Onuakus onc nnn npegncraBurencrBo H cbupma Yokogawa Toate manualele de instructiuni pentru produsele ATEX Ex sunt in limba engleza germana si franceza In cazul in care doriti instructiunile in limba locala trebuie sa contactati cel mai apropiat birou sau reprezentant Yokogawa ll manwali kollha ta l istruzzjonijiet g al prodotti marbuta ma ATEX Ex huma disponibbli bl Ingliz bil Germaniz u bil Franciz Jekk tkun tehtieg struzzjonijiet marbuta ma Ex fil lingwa lokali tieghek ghandek tikkuntattja lill eqreb rapprezentan jew uffi ju ta Yokogawa IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 1 2 Handling Cautions This chapter provides important information on how to handle the indicator Read this carefully before using the indicator FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator thoroughly tested at the factory before shipment When taking delivery of an instrument visually check them to make sure that no damage occurred during shipment Also check that all indicator mounting hardware shown in figure 2 1 is included If the indicator is ordered without the mounting bracket
165. equipment Connect the devices as shown in Figure 5 6 Connect the terminators at both ends of the trunk with a minimum length of the spur laid for connection The polarity of signal and power must be maintained IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 5 Installation gt 5 4 Fieldbus power supply Field device HOST Terminator 7 Terminator F0506 ai Figure 5 6 Cabling Communication terminals connection hook SUPPLY SUPPLY SUPPLY S Power supply and output terminal E Ground terminal F0507 ai Figure 5 7 Wiring Diagram A NOTE No CHECK terminal is used for FVX110 Do not connect anything on CHECK terminal Before using a Fieldbus configuration tool other than the existing host confirm it does not affect the loop functionality in which all devices are already installed in operation Disconnect the relevant control loop from the bus if necessary AA IMPORTANT Connecting a Fieldbus configuration tool to a loop with its existing host may cause communication data scrambling resulting in a functional disorder or a system failure 5 6 Host Setting To activate Fieldbus the following settings are required for the host A IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power immediately after setting When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM the redundant processing is executed for an improvement of reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made
166. es Component name Top field Description Shows the Main Tag and page number information Maximum of 32 characters can be set for Main Tag But 14 characters 8 characters in case page information indicates is limit of displaying on LCD Main Tag scroll enables to confirm more than 14 characters Center field Lower field Indicates process value and measuring unit from field instruments including sign Squawk indicate incase squawk function enabled Displays the Sub Tag a settable descriptor communication status and bar graphs The scaling range of the bar graph must be set elsewhere Additional displays A V Shows scroll knob turning direction Single scroll mode 4 Z Shows scroll knob turning direction continuous scan mode e Flashes when communication status is normal 7 3 4 Communication status indication The lower field of the LCD shows communication status Quality SubStatus Limit Table 7 2 shows characters for each status displayed on the LCD IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items Table 7 2 Communication status indications limit Upper line LCD indication Lower line Status Code Quality Sub status Upp SE EE Not limited Low limited High limited Constant Bad NonSpc Bad NonSpc L Bad NonSpc H Bad NonSpc C Gad Non specific 0x00 0x01 0x02
167. es 70 2070 INO2 SUB TAG abcdefghijiklmno Use the Sub Tag for input 2 Use as a memo field and set the pqrstuvwxyzABC information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in DEF order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 71 2071 INO2 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 2 1000 2 72 2072 INO3 MAIN TAG PD Tag03 Use to set the Main Tag for input 3 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 73 2073 INO3 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 3 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 74 2074 INO3 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 3 1000 2 75 2075 INO4A MAIN TAG PD Tag04 AUTO Use to set the Main Tag for input 4 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 76 2076 INO4A SUB TAG BLK01 OUT AUTO Use the Sub Tag for input 4 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in or
168. ess steel Body 316L SST Scroll Knob 316L SST Cover O rings Buna N Name plate and tag 304 SST 316 SST for optional code HC Degrees of Protection IP67 NEMA4X Weight 1 2 kg 2 6 Ib Without mounting bracket Add 1 5 kg 3 3 Ib for Amplifier housing code 2 Electrical Connections Refer to 13 3 Model and Suffix Codes 13 3 Model and Suffix Codes Model Suffix code Description EFNI iil x d Fieldbus segment indicator Output Suerge Mess e x kane Digital communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol signal Amplifier T I nape Cast aluminum alloy housing EE ASTM CF 8M stainless steel Electrical o G 1 2 female one electrical connection without blind plug connection EE 1 2 NPT female two electrical connections without blind plugs WEEN M20 female two electrical connections without blind plugs B nece geesde G 1 2 female two electrical connections and a blind plug ere ee 1 2 NPT female two electrical connections and a blind plug RE M20 female two electrical connections and a blind plug Bo G 1 2 female two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug PET 1 2 NPT female two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug C see n es M20 female two electrical connections and a 316 SST blind plug Mounting bracket L 316 SST 2 inch pipe mounting eer orice None Optional Codes IL Optional Specification 1 Not applicable for electrical c
169. ether communication with the field device has recovered after a while The new software does not work after the activation The file of the current revision was downloaded Failure of the memory in field device etc Obtain the correct file Check SOFTDWN ERROR in the resource block and re try downloading If fails place a service call IM 01S01C01 01EN A8 4 lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt A8 8 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download TableA8 3 Additional Parameters of Resource Block Relative Index Parameter Name deier Write Description Index Factory Set Mode 53 1053 SOFTDWN PROTECT 0x01 Defines whether to accept software downloads 0x01 Unprotected 0x02 Protected 54 1054 SOFTDWN FORMAT 0x01 Selects the software download method 0x01 Standard 55 1055 SOFTDWN COUNT 0 Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was erased 56 1056 SOFTDWN ACT AREA 0 Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM 0 FlashROM 0 working 1 FlashROM 1 working 57 1057 SOFTDWN MOD REV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates the software module revision 58 1058 SOFTDWN ERROR 0 Indicates an error during a software download See Table 8 4 TableA8 4 Download Error Codes ied Detail Ge Detail 0 No error
170. etting Page number information settings DISP PAGE INFO Page number information for process values indicated by the FVX110 can be displayed in a minute format The denominator indicating the total number of pages is the total number of IN xx xx 01 to 16 specified using VALID CON SUMMARY above F0706 ai Figure 7 6 Setting page number information IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 6 A NOTE DISP_PAGE_INFO does not display numbers of function blocks whose inputs are valid It only displays the numbers of total inputs that are valid which do not necessarily correspond to input signal numbers and page numbers displayed by the minute of function blocks Example When IN 01 IN 03 IN 04 inputs are valid for the function block of the VALID CON SUMMARY page number information is displayed as 1 3 2 3 and 3 3 When DISP PAGE INFO is 0 Knob link page information is displayed only when switching Screens and disappears after a few seconds Page information is displayed at all times when DISP PAGE INFO is set to 1 Active and displays information for highlighted pages when DISP PAGE INFO is set to 2 Active Reverse Setting screen displaying cycle DISPLAY CYCLE Select from AUTO 0 5 sec 1 0 sec 2 0 sec or 4 0 sec for screen displaying cycle This cycle determines the displaying cycle in scan mode displaying cycle of indication in the lower display field scroll bar movement cycle an
171. fications FF 912 67 1067 FD FAIL ACTIVE 0 A parameter that corresponds to Failed in the NAMUR NE 107 category 68 1068 FD OFFSPEC ACTIVE 0 A parameter that corresponds to Off Specification in the NAMUR NE 107 category 69 1069 FD MAINT ACTIVE 0 A parameter that corresponds to Maintenance in the NAMUR NE 107 category 70 1070 FD_CHECK_ACTIVE 0 A parameter that corresponds to Check Function in the NAMUR NE 107 category 71 1071 FD FAIL MAP OxFC000000 Specifies the bit assigned to FD FAIL ACTIVE a parameter for indicating Failed a 32 bit alarm listed in FD SIMULATE DiagnosticValue 72 1072 FD OFFSPEC MAP 0x00003800 Specifies the bit assigned to FD OFFSPEC ACTIVE a parameter for indicating Off Specification a 32 bit alarm listed in FD SIMULATE DiagnosticValue 73 1073 FD MAINT MAP 0x000003E0 Specifies the bit assigned to FD MAINT ACTIVE a parameter for indicating Maintenance a 32 bit alarm listed in FD SIMULATE DiagnosticValue 74 1074 FD CHECK MAP 0x01FF8008 Specifies the bit assigned to FD CHECK ACTIVE a parameter for indicating Check Function a 32 bit alarm listed in FD SIMULATE DiagnosticValue 75 1075 FD FAIL MASK OxFFFFFFFF Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32 bit Failed alarms listed in FD FAIL ACTIVE 76 1076 FD OFFSPEC MASK OxFFFFFFFF Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32 bit Off Specification alarms listed in FD OFFSPEC ACTIVE 7T 1077 FD MAINT M
172. for the ACCUM_TOTAL expanded parameter value The table A2 1 shows the details of INTEG_TYPE IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 5 TableA2 1 INTEG TYPE Integration e Reset Trigger Reset if one of the Name Method Integration Range following conditions is established Trip Output INF lt Total lt TOTAL_SP UP_AUTO 1 Counting up Papel e SHINE GE i ZE SCH o Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF AccTotal lt INF INF lt Total lt INF Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF RESET_IN 1 UP_DEM 2 Starting from o 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP_CMD_INT 1 2 INF lt AccTotal lt INF Counting down p CIE OUT reaches 0 DN AUTO 3 Starting from RESET IN 7 1 O TOTAL_SP Oe R Total TINE Op CND Mrs INF AccTotal lt INF Counting down INF lt Total lt INF 0 lt ATotal lt INF e RESET IN 7 1 eru Aring Tom 0 lt RTotal lt INF Op CMD _INT 1 2 u INF AccTotal lt INF INF Total lt INF T Atthe period specified by PERIODIC Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF CLOCK PER x Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF lt AccTotal lt INF INF lt Total lt INF Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF RESET IN 7 1 DEMAND 6 starting from o 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 e INF lt AccTotal lt INF INF lt Total lt INF s Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF At the period specified by
173. g connector or electrical board check If alarm still persists contact sales office or service center Backup function in operation Repair primary side Repair primary sensor before backup sensor fails Firmware update error Retry updating firmware Retry firmware update Check cause of the failure if alarm persists Communication configuration error Configure communication correctly Correct configuration of communication Non operating state Wait for a while Wait for a while Check cause of the failure if alarm persists Calibration warning Check calibration Investigate cause of failure and recalibrate device Device configuration error Configure device correctly Correct configuration relating to sensor or actuator Function restricted Simulation mode Confirm the state Confirm the state Check if this is right state Check if this is right state Manual mode Confirm the state Check if this is right state Function Block notice Check Function Block status Check conditions of function blocks In order to avoid alarm from unused function blocks configure RESOURCE2 FD EXTENDC MAP n n 1 to 3 parameter Sensor Actuator out of range Check specification Check specification of sensor and actuator Or process conditions may be temporarily non conforming Out of operating limit Check environment Check environment specification of sensor and act
174. hanSignalSkew 1 V PhIS Jabber since last read 11 TimeSyncClass 1 V TSC Tx Good Rx Good 2 Channel 2 1 0x80 Unused 8 DimeBasiclInfo 3 Channel 3 1 0x80 Unused 4 Channel 4 1 0x80 Unused Sub Element Size Description 5 Channel5 1 0x80 Unused index bytes 6 Channel 6 1 0x80 Unused SE ee 7 Channel7 1 0x80 Unused capability value for V ST of the 8 Channel8 1 0x80 Unused device 2 PerDipduPhlOverhead 1 V PhLO 11 PimeBasicInfo MaxResponseDelay 1 Indicates the capability value Sub Element Size Value Description for V MRD of the index bytes device 1 InterfaceMode 1 0 0 Half duplex 4 ThisNode 1 V TN node 1 Full duplex address 2 LoopBackMode 1 0 0 Disabled 1 MAU 5 ThisLink 2 V TL link id 2 MDS 6 MinInterPduDelay 1 Indicates the 3 XmitEnabled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is capability value enabled for V MID of the 4 RcvEnebled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is device enabled 7 TimeSyncClass 1 Indicates the 5 PreferredReceive 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used capability value Channel for reception for V TSC of the 6 MediaType 1 0x49 Wire medium device Selected voltage mode and 8 PreambleExtension 1 V PhPE 31 25 kbps are 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE selected 10 MaxlnterChanSignalSkew 1 V PhIS 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used for reception IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 7 Link Master Functions gt AT 8 12 LinkScheduleActivationVariable Writing
175. hanging the turning direction of the scroll knob you can scroll forward or backward through the displays F0801 ai Figure 8 1 Scroll knob for switching displays A NOTE Long continuous use during high or low temperatures may reduce visibility Should this happen replace the indicator at the earliest opportunity A NOTE Notes for scroll knob operation Do not use a spanner wrench or other tools for turning the scroll knob as it could damage the knob Turn the scroll knob only by hand 8 1 Single Scroll Mode To scroll only one display turn the scroll knob about 90 Single scroll mode An arrow icon A or V indicating the direction the scroll knob is turned will appear in the lower right corner of the display F0802 ai Figure 8 2 Screen display during single display switching A NOTE Turning the scroll knob 90 is only rough description Thus even if a 90 turn of the scroll knob fails to switch the displays this is nota malfunction IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 8 Explanation of Basic Items switching displays gt 8 2 8 2 Continuous Scroll Mode scan mode To scroll display continuosly scan mode turn the scroll knob about 180 or more in less than a second Scan mode operation is automatically cancelled about 1 minute after start of operation To stop during operation turn the scroll knob in the opposite direction used to start continuous scroll mode During continuos scroll mode an ar
176. he Signal Characterizer block dividing its functions into three sections Input section Determines the mode and judges A1 2 2 Judging BLOCK ERR BLOCK ERR indicates the cause of an error in the function block If the cause of an error indicated by BLOCK ERR occurs the following configuration error is generated BLOCK ERR Line segment factor determination section Determines the gradient and intercept for OUT 1 and x Block 1 INFINITY has been configured for OUT 2 based on CURVE X CURVE Y and Configuration CURVE Xand CURVE Y SWAP_2 at shift Error 2 INFINITY has been configured for Output section Multiplies the input values in jj D TA s S SUE i as been contigured Tor IN 1 and IN 2 by the gradient and adds the Y1 of CURVE Y intercept to them before outputting the results 4 A value of the array of CURVE X Alternatively it outputs a limit value Name Description does not increase in a monotone manner 5 A configuration error when SWAP 2 A1 2 Input Section is on A value of the array of CURVE Y does not increase or decrease in a monotone manner 6 The value of SWAP 2 is any value other than 1 or 2 The input section determines the mode and judges BLOCK ERR A1 2 1 Determining the Mode The following describes operations of the Signal Characterizer block The mode changes to O S if a block configuration error occurs Supported Mode Rules O S System sto
177. he adder is passed to the integrator If only one of the inputs is connected the value of a non connected input will be ignored When bit 7 of INTEG_OPTS Add zero if bad has been set if the status of a value after addition is Bad the value after addition increment becomes 0 A2 4 Integrator When addition is complete its result will be passed to the integrator Integration consists of combinations of a reset method and counting up down There are the following seven integration types which can be set using INTEG TYPE 1 UP AUTO Counts up with automatic reset when TOTAL SP is reached UP DEM Counts up with demand reset DN AUTO Counts down with automatic reset when zero is reached DN DEM Counts down with demand reset PERIODIC Counts up and is reset periodically according to CLOCK PER DEMAND Counts up and is reset on demand 7 PER amp DEM Counts up and is reset periodically or on demand OO Om PS WDM Each type of integration is independently run as a function There are the following four types of integrated values 1 Total Integrates the result of the adder as is 2 ATotal Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder 3 RTotal Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder only if the status of the result is Bad This value is used for the RTOTAL value 4 AccTotal An extension function The result of the adder is integrated as is and will not be reset The value is used
178. he following shows the schematic diagram of the specified by the user This function block can also Signal Characterizer block be used as a transmission line for control signals and supports backward control Application The Signal Characterizer block is primarily used if you wish for one of the following reasons to correct signals using the coordinates rather than a computational expression A Inverse function The computational expression for correction in relation to input signals is complex Therelationship between input signals and the signals after correction is only empirically known FA0101 ai Figure A1 1 Signal Characterizer Block Input Output Parameters Input IN 1 Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line segment function It is substituted for X of the line segment function IN 2 Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line segment function If SWAP 2 off it is substituted for X of the line segment function If SWAP 2 on itis substituted for Y of the line segment function Output OUT 1 Outputs the result of the IN 1 input that has been corrected using the line segment function The function block outputs the value of Y corresponding to IN 1 OUT 2 Outputs the result of the IN 2 input that has been corrected using the line segment function The output can also be approximated using the inverse function of the specified line segment funct
179. he same ducts Explosion protected instruments must be wired in accordance with specific requirements and in certain countries legal regulations in order to preserve the effectiveness of their explosion protected features The terminal box cover is locked by an Allen head bolt a shrouding bolt on ATEX flameproof type indicators When the shrouding bolt is driven clockwise using an Allen wrench it goes in The cover lock can then be released and the cover can be opened by hand See subsection 10 2 Disassembly and Reassembly for details Plug and seal an unused conduit connection 5 3 2 Wiring Installation 1 General use Type and Intrinsically Safe Type With the cable wiring use a metallic conduit or waterproof glands Apply a non hardening sealant to the terminal box connection port and to the threads on the flexible metal conduit for waterproofing Flameproof packing adapter Flexible metal conduit SN Wiring metal i conduit g Tee Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads for Drain plug waterproofing F0502 ai Figure 5 2 Typical Wiring Using Flexible Metal Conduit 2 Flameproof Type Wire cables through a flameproof packing adapter or use a flameproof metal conduit m Wiring cable through flameproof packing adapter Apply a non hardening sealant to the terminal box connection port and to the threads on the flameproof packing adapter for waterproofing Flameproof packing a
180. he same segment to transfer the right of being the LAS then becomes the LAS LM Node address 0x14 In the event that the current LAS in this segment node address 0x14 fails the LM with the address of 0x15 SE takes its place to become the LAS LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address 0x15 0x16 OxF1 OxF2 OxF3 OxF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 Figure A7 2 Backup of LAS FA07002 ai To set up an FVX110 as a device that is capable of backing up the LAS follow the procedure below NOTE When changing the settings in an FVX110 add the FVX110 to the segment in which an LAS is running After making changes to the settings do not turn off the power to the FVX110 for at least 30 seconds 1 Set the node address of the FVX110 In general use an address from 0x10 to V FUN 1 0x00 OxOF Not used 0x10 Bridge device 0x13 0x14 V FUN Not used V FUN V NUN OxE7 Basic device por Default address ORFG Portable device address OxFF Figure A7 3 Node Address Ranges M NUN FA0703 ai IM 01S01C01 01EN AT 3 Appendix 7 Link Master Functions 2 In the LAS settings of the FVX110 set the values of V ST V MRD and V MID to the same as the respective lowest c
181. ine inputs and outputs The y points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points If SWAP 2 is on the elements of the curve must be defined with a monotone increase or decrease 17 UPDATE EVT Indicates event information if an update event occurs 18 BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 6 A1 5 Application Example A1 5 1 Input Compensation The following is an application example of pH compensation made by performing feedback control The pH is a value representing the degree of acidity or alkalinity and ranges from 0 to 14 pH 7 indicates neutral a value smaller than 7 represents acidity and a value larger than 7 denotes alkalinity It is very difficult to control pH with a quickly changing reaction rate at a point near 7 14 13 12 11 10 9 Small increases in reagent 6 flow cause large pH shifts 5 4 3 2 1 0 02 04 06 0 8 1 0 12 1 4 1 6 1 8 2 0 Ratio of Reagent to Influent Flow FA0106 ai Figure A1 6 pH and Reagent Flow To control this pH the input is regulated using line segment approximation gain and input compensation Characterizer pH Input x Gain PID Control DM Y Control Output Y Input Compensation FA0107 ai Figure A1 7 Input Compensation The following show
182. ing mode The operating conditions permitted for the LCD transducer block are Automatic AUTO and Out of Service O S mode Settings can normally be changed in the O S mode but can also be performed in the Auto mode except for changes of the block tag parameter of the block header in the LCD transducer block 7 3 3 Indicator names and functions The LCD consists of three fields the top center and bottom fields The top field shows the Main Tag which identifies the instrument whose values are indicated for example PD_Tag and other freely settable information It also shows the page information number of displayed page total number of display pages The middle field shows process value and measuring unit The lower field shows the Sub Tag a field indicating data required for identifying instruments whose values are displayed communication status bar graph and other information At the center right edge there is a scroll bar enabling visual confirmation of page numbers The lower right corner displays an icon indicating the scroll knob turning direction and the center left edge provides an icon indicating communication status The communication signal Main Tag L Page information display Scroll bar turning direction Sub te communication status bar graph selected display F0701 ai Figure 7 1 Display design IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items Table 7 1 Indicated valu
183. ion This is used for backward control If SWAP 2 off the value of Y corresponding to X of IN 1 is output If SWAP 2 on the value of X corresponding to Y of IN 1 is output Others CURVE X The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs The x points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points with a monotone increase INFINITY is configured for unused point s CURVE Y The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs The y points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points If SWAP 2 on the elements of the curve are defined with a monotone increase or decrease INFINITY is configured for unused point s SWAP 2 Selector switch used to specify if an inverse function is used for the line segment approximation of IN 2 to OUT 2 The setting of SWAP 2 on which uses the inverse function is used for backward control IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 2 Line segment factor determination section Output section Input section Y OUT X Determining processing Determining BLOCK ERR the gradient the mode dint t SISCH Determining the LOUT 2 status and computing OUT XorY CURVE X SWAP 2 CURVE Y D MODE AUTO MODE MAN or O S FA0102 ai Figure A1 2 Overview of the Signal Characterizer Block The following describes t
184. ion of nonincendive field wiring apparatus with associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified locations Note 9 Installation requirements Vmax 2 Voc or Vt Imax see note 10 Ca 2 Ci Ccable LazLi Lcable Note 10 For this current controlled circuit the parameter Imax is not required and need not be aligned with parameter Isc of the barrier or associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus Note 11 If ordinary location wiring methods are used indicator and field instruments shall be connected to FM Approved associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus Electrical data Vmax 32 V Ci 1 76 nF Li O pH e FNICO Rules The FNICO Concept allows the interconnection of nonincendive field wiring apparatus to associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Vmax the current Imax and the power Pmax which nonincendive field wiring apparatus can receive and remain nonincendive considering faults must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo Voc or Vt the current lo Isc or It and the power Po which can be provided by the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus supply unit In addition the maximum unprotected residual capacitance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than terminators connected to the Fieldbus must be less th
185. ion of inputs EACH BAR GRAPH Bar graphs display upper and lower limit values according to values scaled using INxx_ SCALE xx 01 to 16 In a batch bar graph setting setting BAR GRAPH SELECT 0 All are set to inactive will turn off all bar graph displays and setting 2 All are set to active will display bar graphs on all screens When bar graphs are enabled the lower display field will alternately display Sub Tag communication status and bar graphs in stated order according to the interval set by DISPLAY CYCLE 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 5 Scroll bar display setting V SCROLL BAR Use V SCROLL BAR to set the scroll bar display setting Set V SCROLL BAR 0 Inactive to turn off the scroll bar display and set it to V SCROLL BAR 1 Active to have it on at all times Selecting V SCROLL BAR 2 Knob link will turn on the scroll bar display only during display switching and turns off the display within a few seconds F0705 ai Figure7 5 Scroll bar settings Changing scroll direction SCROLL DIRECTION The user can change the direction of display changes made using the scroll knob Selecting 0 Turn page clockwise for SCROLL DIRECTION increases page numbers For example 1 16 2 16 gt gt 16 16 gt 1 162 when the scroll knob is turned clockwise Selecting 1 Turn page counter clockwise increase page numbers when the scroll knob is turned counter clockwise 0 Turn page clockwise is the factory default s
186. is the maximum number of inputs 5 If the value is out of the SELECT TYPE setting range when the value of OP SELECT is zero As long as there is one valid input even an invalid input can be selected for OP SELECT If the number of valid inputs is greater than the value of MIN GOOD the number of the input including an invalid input specified by OP SELECT will be stored in SELECTED Therefore even if an invalid input is selected SELECTED does not become zero If no input is selected for OP SELECT the output of SELECTED will depend on SELECT TYPE The Table A3 1 shows the value of SELECTED according to the number of valid inputs and SELECT TYPE TableA3 1 X Value of SELECTED According to Inputs Value of SELECTED Validinputs SELECT TYPE wan MAKIMUM SELECT TE SELECT TYPE First Good orLatched Good MIDDLE AVERAGE None 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero 1 of IN with a smaller of selected IN of selected IN 1 Multiple INs value 0 the average is taken of valid INs Even of INS the average is taken Multiple INs of IN with the middle Odd of INs value Table A3 2 Value of SELECTED According to the Mode O S MAN AUTO 0 0 0to8 IM 01S01C01 01EN A3 13 lt Appendix 3 Input Selector IS Block gt A3 4 2 OUT Processing OUT is an output parameter used to send the value selected in the IS block to another function block The following descri
187. ition to Fault Stale nanaraman iniia A6 3 A6 3 2 Clearing a Fault State eeng oue seceDeeno seated A6 3 A6 3 3 Fault State OperatlOn eoe tte OR X ERR QR KR EDEN ARRR ER A6 3 A6 4 Status Transitions etr erant nena dvi aai adaa ha nene nana na A6 4 A6 5 Parameter list display nece tenentes A6 4 Appendix 7 Link Master Functions esee AT 1 AT 1 Link Active Scheduler ertet rng a anaa aaa raans AT 1 IM 01S01C01 01EN vi A7 2 Link Mate AT 1 AT 3 Transfer of LAS rennen netu riii inu rn ausu rix ERR AREE ERCERRE AT 2 A7 4 Belle d AT 3 AT 5 LM Parameters eicere dese censersnctes itn n here kin e unam ea ner ain MR dnasesebexes AT 4 AT 5 1 EM Parameter List iron etes evite oa HY equ ta a Ye dean AT 4 AT 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameter AT 6 AT 6 j erp AT 8 Appendix 8 Software Download c eeeeeeeeee eere eenne nennen A8 1 A8 1 Benefits of Software Download eese A8 1 A8 2 lee E A8 1 A8 3 Preparations for Software Downloading eene A8 1 A8 4 Software Download Sequence eese A8 2 A8 5 Download Files 1 center svecauiecveceveaneessnercveaevedetesaneredeces A8 2 A8 6 Steps after Activating a Field Device
188. ject 3 19 or 35 is not open C 0x00001000 Link Obj 4 20 36 Not Open Link object 4 20 or 36 is not open C 0x00000800 Link Obj 5 21 37 Not Open Link object 5 21 or 37 is not open C 0x00000400 Link Obj 6 22 38 Not Open Link object 6 22 or 38 is not open C 0x00000200 Link Obj 7 23 39 Not Open Link object 7 23 or 39 is not open C 0x00000100 Link Obj 8 24 40 Not Open Link object 8 24 or 40 is not open C 0x00000080 Link Obj 9 25 Not Open Link object 9 or 25 is not open C 0x00000040 Link Obj 10 26 Not Open Link object 10 or 26 is not open C 0x00000020 Link Obj 11 27 Not Open Link object 11 or 27 is not open C 0x00000010 Link Obj 12 28 Not Open Link object 12 or 28 is not open C 0x00000008 Link Obj 13 29 Not Open Link object 13 or 29 is not open C 0x00000004 Link Obj 14 30 Not Open Link object 14 or 30 is not open C 0x00000002 Link Obj 15 31 Not Open Link object 15 or 31 is not open C 0x00000001 Link Obj 16 32 Not Open Link object 16 or 32 is not open C IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 11 Device Information gt 11 2 Table 11 2 Contents of DEVICE STATUS 2 index 1046 Hexadecimal Diplay through DD Description NE eege 0x80000000 LTB in O S Mode LCD Transducer Block is in O S mode C 0x40000000 LCD Failure LCD has been failing F 0x20000000 Amp Temp Out of Range Amplifier temperature is out specification range S 0x00008000 M
189. k is in O S mode The MAO1 block is in O S mode The MAC2 block is in O S mode The display will then indicate FVX RB OOS FVX MAO1 OOS or FVX MAO2 OOS FUR Error identification on indicator when MAO block is in O S mode F0901 ai Figure 9 1 When process value have transferred correctly from field instruments the e icon at the center part of the display flashes When they are not correctly transferred the e icon is off and the process value will be highlighted F0902 ai Example showing when process value have correctly transferred Figure 9 2 F0903 ai Example showing when process value have not correctly transferred Figure 9 3 The e icon is not displayed during simulation 9 2 2 Alarms and Events The following alarms or events can be reported by the FVX110 if Link object and VCR static entry are set Analog Alerts Generated when a process value exceeds threshold By PID Block Hi Hi Alarm Hi Alarm Low Alarm Low Low Alarm Deviation Hi Alarm Deviation Low Alarm Discret Alerts Generated when an abnormal condition is detected By Resource Block Block Alarm Write Alarm By Transducer Block Block Alarm By MAO SC IT IS AR and PID Blocks Block Alarm Update Alerts Generated when an important restorable parameter is updated By Resource Block Update Event By Transducer Block Update Event By MAO SC IT IS AR and PID Blocks Update Event Field Diagnostic Alerts Generate
190. l must also be specified in CONTROL_OPTS A5 13 Measured value Tracking Measured value tracking also referred to as SP PV tracking is an action to equalize the setpoint SP to the measured value PV when the block mode MODE_BLK actual is Man in order to prevent a sudden change in control output from being caused by a mode change to Auto While a cascade primary control block is performing the automatic or cascade control in the Auto or Cas mode when the mode of its secondary control block is changed from Cas to Auto the cascade connection is opened and the control action of the primary block stops The SP of the secondary controller can be equalized to its cascade input signal CAS IN also in this case The settings for measured value tracking are made in the parameter CONTROL OPTS as shown in the table below Options in Description CONTROL OPTS Bypass Enable This parameter allows BYPASS to be set SP PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE Man BLK target is set to Man SP PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE ROut BLK target is set to ROut SP PV Track in LO Equalizes SP to PV when actual is or IMan setto LO or IMAN SP PV Track retained Target Equalizes SP to RCAS IN when MODE BLK target is set to RCas and to CAS IN when MODE BLK target is set to Cas when the actual mode of the block is IMan LO Man or ROut Direct Acting Set the PID block to a direct acting controller Track
191. lace automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met N status is Bad except when the control action bypass is on To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met Target to Manual if BAD IN must be specified beforehand in STATUS _ OPTS The table below shows the options in STATUS OPTS Options in Appendix 5 PID Block A5 9 A5 17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure When the data status of RCAS IN or ROUT IN which is the setting received from a computer as the setpoint SP falls to Bad while the PID block is running in the RCas or ROut mode the mode shedding occurs in accordance with the settings in SHED OPT If the RCAS IN data is not renewed within the time specified by SHED RCAS in resource block the data status of RCAS_IN falls to Bad A5 17 1 SHED OPT The SHED OPT setting stipulates the specifications of mode shedding as shown below Only one can be set STATUS OPTS Description i IFS if BAD IN Sets the sub status component of Available e 3 OUT status to IFS if IN status is Bad Setting for Actions upon Computer Failure except when PID control bypass is SHED OFT on Normal shed Sets MODE_BLK actual to Cas 1 and IFS if BAD CAS Sets the sub status component of normal return leaves MODE BLK target unchanged IN OUT status to IFS if CAS IN status Normal shed Sets bo
192. le and accurate performance take the following precautions when selecting the installation location a Ambient Temperature Avoid locations subject to wide temperature variations or a significant temperature gradient If the location is exposed to radiant heat from plant equipment provide adequate thermal insulation and or ventilation b Ambient Atmosphere Do not install the indicator in a corrosive atmosphere If this cannot be avoided there must be adequate ventilation as well as measures to prevent the leaking of rain water and the presence of standing water in the conduits IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 2 c Shock and Vibration Although the indicator is designed to be relatively resistant to shock and vibration an installation site should be selected where this is kept to a minimum o Installation of Explosion protected Indicators An explosion protected indicators is certified for installation in a hazardous area containing specific gas types See subsection 2 8 Installation of an Explosion Protected Indicators 2 5 Waterproofing of Cable Conduit Connections Apply a non hardening sealant to the threads to waterproof the indicator cable conduit connections See figure 5 2 5 3 and 5 4 2 6 Restrictions on Use of Radio Transceivers AA IMPORTANT Although the indicator has been designed to resist high frequency electrical noise if a radio transceiver is used near the indi
193. locations because this product is sealed at the factory The grounding terminals are located on the inside and outside of the terminal area Connect the cable to grounding terminal in accordance with wiring procedure 1 or 2 IJ 2 Internal grounding terminal terminal Cy 1 External grounding F0212 ai Wiring Procedure for Grounding Terminals 4 Operation A WARNING OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS USER S MANUAL Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location 5 Maintenance and Repair A WARNING The instrument modification or part replacement by other than an authorized Representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the certification IM 01S01C01 01EN 6 Name Plate e Name plate SEGMENT INDICATOR Nei rvxuo STYLE EE E SUFFIX SUPPLY e Tag plate for flameproof type lo KEMA 10ATEX0157 SA Ex tD A21 IP6X T80 C nlcosure mb GAS 50 15 to 75 C mb Dust 40 15 to 75 C I 2G I 2D 0344 WARNING A AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WHEN THE AMBIENT TEM USE THE HEAT RESISTING GABLES 90 C e Tag plate for intrinsically safe type No ebe 1IATEX0022 X Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga Ex a MC Es rc Da IP6X ENCLOSURE ere SE y Parameter s Ui i 24V li
194. lue of IN_1 corrected using a line segment function OUT 2 MAN Outputs the result of the value of IN 2 corrected using a line segment function It is also possible to approximate the result using the inverse function of the specified line segment function This is used for backward control X RANGE 100 1342 11 The engineering unit of variables corresponding to the X axis for display 10 Y RANGE 100 1342 11 The engineering unit of variables corresponding to the Y axis for display 11 GRANT DENY The parameter used to check if various operations have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before being executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked for the setting of any bit relating to the corresponding operation If no bit is set itis evident that the operations have been executed successfully 12 Input a signal to be corrected using a line segment function 13 Input a signal to be corrected using a line segment function 14 15 SWAP 2 CURVE X O Initialized 1 No swap 2 Swap Selector switch used to apply the inverse function to line segment approximation of IN_2 to OUT_2 Curve input points that determine inputs and outputs The x points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points with a monotone increase 16 CURVE_Y Curve input points that determ
195. ly Then insert the CPU board assembly straight onto the post in the case 3 Tighten the two bosses AA NOTE Confirm that the scroll knob screw pin is placed properly in the groove on the bracket prior to tightening the two bosses If it is not the display scroll mechanism will be damaged 4 Replace the Display cover IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 11 Device Information gt 11 1 11 Device Information 11 1 DEVICE STATUS Device status for the FVX110 are indicated by using parameter DEVICE STATUS 1to DEVICE STATUS 3 index 1045 to 1047 in Resource Block Table 11 1 Contents of DEVICE STATUS 1 index 1045 Hexadecimal Diplay through DD Description NE eech 0x10000000 Write Locked Write lock is ON 0x08000000 Hard Write Lock SW ON Hardware write lock switch is ON 0x04000000 Abnormal Boot Process Abnormal boot processing was detected at the starting F 0x02000000 SoftDL Failure Software download has failed C 0x01000000 SoftDL Incomplete Software download is incomplete C 0x00800000 Simulation Switch ON Software or hardware simulation switch is ON 0x00400000 RB in O S Mode Resource Block is in O S mode C 0x00080000 Amp EEPROM Failure Amplifier EEPROM failed F 0x00008000 Link Obj 1 17 33 Not Open Link object 1 17 or 33 is not open C 0x00004000 Link Obj 2 18 34 Not Open Link object 2 18 or 34 is not open C 0x00002000 Link Obj 3 19 35 Not Open Link ob
196. ly changed with respect to the value of PRE OUT for time set by BAL TIME is output The PRE OUT always indicates the results of calculation After elapse of BAL TIME OUT PRE OUTis established Note that if the value of BAL TIME is changed during linear change of the OUT value it is not reflected The value of BAL TIME will be reflected only after the mode is changed the next time AUTO MAN AUTO BAL_TIME an Case of BAL_TIME 5 sec FA0404 ai The value of OUT is represented by the following equation yn yn 1 xn yn 1 a n a T tc 1 The value of T tc truncates digits to the right of the decimal point where y OUT x PRE OUT tc period of execution T BAL TIME n period A4 4 2 Status Handling The setting of INPUT_OPTS is applied to the input status When INPUT_OPTS is applied there are cases where the PV status becomes good even if the status of main inputs is uncertain or the status of auxiliary inputs is uncertain or bad The PV status is classified by the following Ifthe statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See A4 2 1 Main Inputs If only one ofthe statuses of two main inputs is good Ifthe status of IN is good and that of IN LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE LO The status of IN applies IN l
197. m the setpoint SP and is generally used for constant setpoint and cascaded setpoint control A5 1 Function Diagram The figure below depicts the function diagram of a PID block BKCAL_OUT BKCAL IN _ RCAS OUT ROUT IN ROUT OUT Setpoint CAS_IN RCAS_IN OUT Feed forward PID Control IN PV Computation Input Filter Data Status Management Alarm Processing Output Tracking Mode Control TRK IN D TRK VAL FA0501 ai Figure A5 1 PID Block A5 2 Functions of PID Block The table below shows the functions provided in a PID block Function Description PID control computation Computes the control output in accordance with the PID control algorithm Control output Converts the change in control output AMV to the manipulated value MV that is to be actually output Switching of direction of Switches over the direction of control action between direct and reverse i e the direction of changes in control action the control output depending on the changes in the deviation Control action bypass When the bypass is on the value of the SP is scaled to the range of the OUT and output as the OUT Feed forward Adds the value of the FF_VAL input to the PID block to the output from the PID computation Measured value tracking Equalizes the setpoint SP to the measured value PV Setpoint limiters Limit the value of setpoint SP within the preset upper and lower levels as well as limit th
198. max Software download condition 24 mA max Ambient Temperature Limits 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Top line Ambient Humidity Limits Process value 9 digits a die wo 0 to 100 RH Middle line 5 digits Bottom line YOKOGAWA 4 F1301 ai Display Scroll Functions Single scroll and cyclic scroll Scan mode Display up to 16 variables EMC Conformity Standard C n200 EN61326 1 Class A Table 2 For use in industrial location Link Master Function Link Master function is supported Function Block Block name Number Execution time Output eight analog signals from field deveces IS 2 30 ms Input Selector block provides selection of up to eight inputsand generate an output based on the configured action AR 2 30 ms Arithmetic block permits simple use of popular measurement math func tion PID 2 45 ms Works as a field controller in conjunction with another function block SC 1 30 ms An output of Signal Characterizer block is a nonlinear function of the respective input The function is determined by a table IT 1 30 ms Integrator block integrates a variable as a function of the time or accumu lates the counts IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 13 General Specifications gt 13 2 13 2 Physical Specifications Enclosure Material Housing Low copper cast aluminum alloy with polyurethane mint green paint Munsell 5 6BG 3 3 2 9 or its equivalent or ASTM CF 8M stainl
199. minus leadwire to the grounding terminal 3 Turn ON the insulation tester power and measure the insulation resistance The voltage should be applied as briefly as possible to verify that the insulation resistance is at least 20 MO 4 After completing the test and being very careful not to touch exposed conductors disconnect the insulation tester and connect a 100 kQ resistor between the grounding terminal and the short circuiting SUPPLY terminals Leave this resistor connected at least one second to discharge any static potential Do not touch the terminals while it is discharging Dielectric Strength Test 1 Short circuit the and SUPPLY terminals in the terminal box 2 Turn OFF the dielectric strength tester Then connect the tester between the shorted SUPPLY terminals and the grounding terminal Be sure to connect the grounding lead of the dielectric strength tester to the ground terminal 3 Set the current limit on the dielectric strength tester to 10 mA then turn ON the power and gradually increase the test voltage from 0 to the specified voltage 4 When the specified voltage is reached hold it for one minute 5 After completing this test slowly decrease the voltage to avoid any voltage surges IM 01S01C01 01EN 2 8 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument If a customer makes a repair or modification to an intrinsically safe or explosionproof instrument and the instrument is not rest
200. most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 10 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt pic Index Parameter Name Factory Default us Explanation 97 2097 IN11 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 11 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 98 2098 IN11 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 11 1000 2 99 2099 IN12 MAIN TAG PD Tag12 Use to set the Main Tag for input 12 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to indentify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 100 2100 IN12 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 12 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 101 2101 IN12 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 12 1000 2 102 2102 IN13 MAIN TAG PD Tag13 Use to set the Main Tag for input 13 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in orde
201. n IfINTEG TYPE is any setting other than UP AUTO or DN AUTO this option is irrelevant Generate reset event bit 9 of INTEG OPTS If this option is enabled an alert event is generated if a reset occurs A2 7 List of Integrator Block Parameters indas Parameter Initial Write View Definition Name Value Mode 1 2 3 4 0 BLOCK TAG IT Block ll Information relating to this function block such as block tag DD revision HEADER Tag O S execution time 1 ST_REV 0 2 2 2 2 The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Integrator block 2 TAG_DESC Null Stores comments describing tag information 3 STRATEGY 1 2 The strategy field is used by a high level system to identify the function block 4 ALERT_KEY 1 1 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 Integrator block mode O S MAN and AUTO are supported 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 Indicates the active error conditions associated with the function block in bit strings 7 TOTAL_SP 1000000 0 4 4 The setpoint of an integrated value or a start value for counting down 8 OUT MAN 5 5 The block output 9 OUT RANGE 1000000 0 11 Set scaling for output display This does not affect operation of the function 0 0 block 290 It is used for making memos 10 GRANT_DENY 0 2 The parameter for checking if various operations have been exec
202. n Hazardous Location ji Terminator l a AE een et 0 O i 1 General Porpose 1 Equipment i i O o l EE E gebaier et ee vest IM 01S01C01 01EN 2 14 F0215 ai lt 3 Component Names gt 3 1 3 Component Names Conduit connection Terminal box cover Note 1 Conduit connection CPU assembly YOKOGAWA 4 Display assembly Mounting screw c 1 M Je SIM ENABLE switch Display cover 29 Q WRITE LOCK switch SIM ENABLE Switch WRITE LOCK Switch SIM ENABLE 1 Du O WRITE LOCK Switch poston UI III Wis Switch position e mea 218 2L NIS OFF ON OFF ON Simulation disenable Simulation enable WRITE LOCK wRITE LOCK OFF WRITE LOCK ON SIM ENABLE F0301 ai Note 1 See Subsection 13 3 Model and Suffix codes for details Note 2 Setthe switches as shown in the figure above to set the SIM ENABLE and WRITE LOCK The SIM ENABLE and WRITE LOCK switch is set to OFF for delivery For function detail please refer to Subsection 9 3 and 94 Figure 3 1 Component Names IM 01S01C01 01EN 4 About Fieldbus gt 4 1 4 About Fieldbus 4 1 Outline Fieldbus is a widely used bi directional digital communication protocol for field devices that enable the simultaneous output to many types of data to the process control system FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicatior employs the specification standardized by The
203. n as is not set in E target when the following condition is met sets MODE BLK actual to Auto 2 and N status data status of IN is Bad except when MODE BLK target to Cas the control action bypass is on To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met Targetto next permitted mode if BAD CAS IN must be previously specified in STATUS _ OPTS AND Auto must be previously setin MODE BLK permitted zq The modes to which a PID block can transfer are limited to those set in MODE_BLK permitted and the priority levels of modes are as shown below In fact if Normal shed normal return is set for SHED_OPT detection of a computer failure causes MODE_BLK actual to change to Cas Auto or MAN whichever is set in MODE_BLK permitted and has the lowest priority level Lower priority gt Higher priority level level ROut RCas Cas Auto Man FA0505 ai 2 Only when Auto is set as permitted mode IM 01S01C01 01EN A5 10 lt Appendix 5 PID Block gt NOTE Ifa control block is connected as a cascade primary block of the PID block in question a mode transition of the PID block to Cas occurs in the following sequence due to initialization of the cascade connection RCas or ROut Auto Cas A5 18 Alarms There are two kinds of alarms generated by a PID block block and process alarms A5 18 1 Block Alarm BLOCK ALM The block alarm BLOCK ALM is generated upon o
204. nA n A IM 01S01C01 01EN T Explanation of Basic Items 7 12 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD 1214 pA o A 1250 F m Fo m 1215 C C 1251 yF m u EI m 1216 MC M C 1252 nF m n EI m 1217 kC k C 1253 pF m p EI m 1218 uC u C 1254 Cem Q o om 1219 nC n Cc 1255 A m2 A m2 M A 220 pc pc 1256 MA cm2 j imo S A 221 Ach Ae N 1257 A cm2 c m k A 222 C m3 C m 1258 KA m2 m2 Cc 223 C mm3 m m 1259 A m A 1 m C l 224 C cm3 Gy ine 8 1260 kA m k A m 1 di 1261 Al 225 kC m3 1 ws cm A c m 1226 C m3 ba 1262 T mC m I m 3 T 1227 C m3 KZ 1263 T uC m m m m T 1228 C m2 C m 1264 uT u T 4 G d 229 C mm2 m ume 1265 nT nm C 230 C cm2 com 2 1266 Wb W b k C 231 kC m2 J uw 2 1267 mWb m W b 1 CI os b 232 mC m2 m2 1268 Wb m Wb m u C k Wb 1233 uC m2 m 1269 kWb m SEN 1234 Vim V m 1270 H H 1235 MV m MV m 1271 mH m id 1236 kV m k VI m 1272 uH u H 1237 Vicm V e m 1273 nH n H 1238 mV m m Wm 1274 picoH pi c o H 1239 yV m cM qom 1275 H m Ho dm 1240 V V 1276 yH m wv Boum 1241 MV M V 1277 nH m n Hu um 1242 kV k V 1278 Am Ade m 2 p N e m 243 mV m V 1279 Nem2 A l A 1244 uV u V 1280 Wb m Wb m 1245 F F 1281 Q Sr 1246 mF m F
205. nals The following are required for use with Fieldbus devices Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices including the host Conventional DC current cannot be used as is Hazardous area Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators Refer to the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host Field devices Connect Fieldbus communication type field devices Two or more EJX YTA AXF or other devices can be connected Host Used for accessing field devices A dedicated host such as DCS is used for an instrumentation line while dedicated communication tools are used for experimental purposes For operation of the host refer to the instruction manual for each host No other details on the host are given in this manual Cable Used for connecting devices Refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K03A01 01E for details of instrumentation cabling For laboratory or other experimental use a twisted pair cable two to three meters in length with a cross section of 0 9 mm or more and a cycle period of within 5 cm 2 inches may be used Termination processing depends on the type of device being deployed For FVX110 use an M4 screw terminal claw Some hosts require a connector Refer to Yokogawa when making arrangements to F0505 ai purchase the recommended
206. nication A range of 20 to 247 or hexadecimal 14 to F7 can be set The device LM device with bus control function Link Master function is allocated from a smaller address number 20 side and other devices BASIC device without bus control function allocated from a larger address number 247 side respectively Place the FVX110 in the range of the BASIC device When the FVX110 is used as Link Master place the FVX110 in the range of the LM device Set the range of addresses to be used to the LM device Set the following parameters Table 6 1 Parameters for Setting Address Range Symbol Parameters Description V FUN First Unpolled Indicates the address Node next to the address range used for the host or other LM device V NUN Number of consecutive Unpolled Node Unused address range The devices within the address range written as Unused in Figure 6 1 cannot be used on a Fieldbus For other address ranges the range is periodically checked to identify when a new device is mounted Care must be taken to keep the unused device range as narrow as possible so as to lessen the load on the Fieldbus 0x00 Not used OxOF 0x10 0x13 0x14 Bridge device LM device V FUN Unused V NUN V FUN V NUN BASIC device OxE7 OxF8 Default address OxEB OxFC Portable device address OxFF F0601 ai Figure 6 1 Available Range of Node Addresses To ensure st
207. ntegrator Integrates the result of the adder into the integrated value Output process section Determines the status and value of each output parameter Reset process section Resets the integrated values Figure A2 1 Integrator Block IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 2 Input Process Section When executed the Integrator block first performs input processing in the order of Determining input status Converting Rate or Accum Determining the input flow direction Switching between Convert Rate and Convert Accum is made using bit 0 for IN 1 or bit 1 for IN 2 of INTEG OPTS INTEG_OPTS is one of the system parameters and should be set by the user The values of IN 1 and IN_2 are not retained if the power is turned OFF A2 2 4 Determining Input Value Statuses The following shows the correlation between the statuses of input parameters IN 1 IN 2 and the statuses of input values used in the Integrator block Statuses of Input Bit 4 of INTEG OPTS Bit 5 of INTEG OPTS Status of Input Values Parameters IN 1 IN 2 Use Uncertain Use Bad Handled in IT Block Good Irrelevant Irrelevant Good Bad Irrelevant H 71 Good Bad Irrelevant L 70 Bad Uncertain H 71 Irrelevant Good Uncertain L 70 Irrelevant Bad For addition see A2 3 if the status of an input value is Bad the Good value just before the status changed to Bad is used Evenifthe Use Bad
208. o LO mode The MAO function block automatically transitions to LO mode when the FAULT_STATE parameter located in the Resource Block parameter is 2 Active IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 6 Multiple Analog Output MAO Block gt A6 3 A6 3 Fault State Blocks and inputs in the MAO function block that are not in the normal state transition to the fault state status Use the FSTATE_STATUS parameter to confirm inputs in the fault state status A6 3 1 Transition to Fault State If the input status stays in the Bad status for longer than the time set using FSTATE_TIME the input transitions to the fault state status When the MAO function block is in LO mode all inputs transferred to LCD Transducer Block transition to the fault state status A6 3 2 Clearing a Fault State Run the MAO function block in Auto mode to change the status of inputs to something other than Bad to clear fault state status A6 3 3 Fault State Operation Operation in fault state status is defined by MO_OPTS MO_OPTS Ges Name Definition 0 Fault state to value 1 Operation when input 1 is in the fault state 1 Fault state to value 2 Operation when input 2 is in the fault state 2 Fault state to value 3 Operation when input 3 is in the fault state 3 Fault state to value 4 Operation when input 4 is in the fault state 4 Fault state to value 5 Operation when input 5 is in the fault state 5 Fault state to value 6 Oper
209. of VAlUCS ccceeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeees 5 6 5 11 Generation of Alarm eeeeeeeeesseesseeseeseeeetnn nenne nnne nennt tnnt nunnana 5 6 Mors e 6 1 6 1 Network Design eene nonu nuo nasnsa uncia nai urina nti ndas 6 1 6 2 Network Definition eeeeeeeeeeeeessesesseeeeeeeeennn nnnm nnn tnn natn n na tnn nnne nnne 6 2 6 3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks eene 6 3 6 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses eene 6 4 6 5 Communication Setting oneris 6 4 6 5 1 VCR Settings nouo hao aio fin ae festa fas 6 4 6 5 2 Function Block Execution Control 6 6 6 6 Block Setting rerit nta nsn atit ua Res nian a Ran R REIS 6 6 6 6 1 EE DU 6 6 6 6 2 Trend ODbJeGL auicca irr tc terc de e ee 6 7 6 6 3 View ODIGGL 2 te detallada mite mtem e 6 7 6 6 4 Function Block Parameter 6 10 Explanation of Basic ltems cessent 7 1 7 1 eum Lt 7 1 7 2 Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process 7 1 7 3 LCD Transducer Block nire tante niin vana Niis 7 1 7 3 1 Function Outlme esses 7 1 7 3 2 Ee le Rule TEE 7 1 7 3 3 Indicator names and functions see 7 1 7 3 4 Communication status indication eseeeee 7 2 7 3 5 Indicator ne E 7 4 7 3 6
210. ol s error messages see also the software s User s Manual Table A8 2 Problems after Software Update Symptom An error occurs before starting a download disabling the download An error occurs after starting a download disabling the download Cause The selected download file is not for the selected field device You attempted to update the device revision by downloading a file which is not an original file Remedy Check SOFTDWN ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file Check SOFTDWN ERROR in the resource block and obtain the original file The selected field device does not support software downloading Check whether the option code EE is included in the model and suffix codes of the device The voltage on the fieldbus segment falls below the specified limit 9 volts Check the capacity of the field bus power supply used and the voltage at the terminal There was an error in a checksum or the number of transmission bytes Check SOFTDWN ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file The download tool does not allow download with same software revision Check the setting of the download tool The download takes far longer than expected or fails frequently The fieldbus segment is noisy Check the noise level on the fieldbus segment An error occurs after activation Transient error caused by the internal resetting of the field device Check wh
211. on must be disabled immediately after using this function The FD SIMULATE parameter located in the Resource Block consists of the elements shown in Table 9 3 Table 9 3 FD SIMALATION parameters Subindex Parameters Description 1 Diagnostic Sets alarm bits that Simulate Value perform simulation When Sub index3 Enable becomes disabled Sub index2 Diagnostic Value is displayed here 2 Diagnostic Value This parameter displays actual instrument diagnostics states at all times not simulation diagnostics alarms It controls the simulator function 1 Simulation inhibited default setting 2 Simulation start 3 Enable Turn on the simulator function either by the SIMULATE ENABLE switch or by setting SIM ENABLE MSGin the Resource Block to ON when 2 is set in Enable for the Sub index parameter in Table 9 3 to generate the alarm bits set in the Sub index parameter Diagnostic Simulate Value Use this function to check whether or not the field instrument can correctly generate diagnostics alarms Amplifier Assembly SIM ENABLE 1 IM Je OFF during operation F0904 ai Figure9 4 SIMULATE ENABLE Switch IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 9 In Process Operation gt 9 5 9 4 Write lock Write protect function The FVX110 is provided with a write lock write protect function to restrict write operations to blocks and prevent inadvertent writing of parameter data To enable this func
212. on number used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 11 1011 DEV TYPE 16 Manufacturer s model number associated with the resourceused by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource 12 1012 DEV REV Manufacturer revision number associated with the resourceused by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 13 1013 DD REV Revision of the DD associated with the resource used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 14 1014 GRANT DENY Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating tuning and alarm parameters of the block 15 1015 HARD TYPES Scalar input The types of hardware available as channel numbers bitO Scalar input bit1 Scalar output bit2 Discrete input bit3 Discrete output 16 1016 RESTART Allows a manual restart to be initiated Several degrees of restart are possible They are 1 Run 2 Restart resource 3 Restart with initial value specified in FF functional spec 1 and 4 Restart processor 1 FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Part 2 17 1017 FEATURES Reports Fault state Soft W Lock Hard W Lock Multi bit Alarm support Used to show supported resource block options 18 1018 FEATURE SEL Report Fault state Soft W Lock AUTO Used to select resource block op
213. onnection code 0 5 7 or 9 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 13 General Specifications gt 13 3 13 4 Optional Specifications For Explosion Protected type Item Description Code FM Explosionproof Approval Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 Entity Parameters for Intrinsically Safe Ui Vmax 24 V li Imax 250 mA Pi Pmax 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH or Ui Vmax 17 5 V li Imax 500 mA Pi Pmax 5 5 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH Nonincendive for Class I Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Class Il Division 2 Groups F amp G Class III Division 1 Ex nL IIC T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Encl Type 4X IP66 and IP67 Entity Parameters for Nonincendive Ui 32 V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH Explosionproof for Class Division 1 Groups B C and D FF1 Dust ignitionproof for Class II III Division 1 Groups E F and G Enclosure Rating NEMA Type 4X Temperature class T6 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F FM Intrinsically Safe and Nonincendive Approval Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 ISA60079 27 Intrinsically Safe for Class l ll amp IIl Division 1 Groups A B C D E F amp G Entity FISCO Class I Zone 0 Factory AEx ia IIC Mutual FM Enclosure NEMA 4X Temp Class T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Intrinsically Apparatus Parameters FISCO OCH Ui217 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH
214. ons even while software is being downloaded to them Upon completion of a download however the devices will be reset internally to make the new downloaded software take effect and this will halt fieldbus communication and function block executions for about one minute lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt A8 1 Download A8 3 Preparations for Software Downloading For software downloading you need to prepare the following Software download tool Software for downloading file for each of the target field devices For the software download tool use only a program developped for that purpose For details see the software s User s Manual For information about updates of software binary files for field devices and how to obtain them visit the following web site http Awww yokogawa com fld fld top en htm A caution Do not hook up the software download tool to a fieldbus segment while the plant is in operation as it may temporarily disturb the communication Always connect the tool before starting operation AA NOTE The download tool can not execute downloading during other system connects to the system network management VFD of the device IM 01S01C01 01EN A8 2 lt Appendix 8 Software Download gt A8 4 Software Download Sequence The flowchart below outlines the software download procedure Although the time taken for the entire procedure varies depending on the size of the field bus device
215. ood input if its status is bad 8to 15 Reserved 14 17514 17614 IN Input block 15 17515 17615 IN LO Input for a low range indicator This is used for the RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION 16 17516 17616 IN 1 Auxiliary input 1 17 17517 17617 IN 2 Auxiliary input 2 18 17518 17618 IN 3 Auxiliary input 3 19 17519 17619 RANGE HI High limit for switching to a high range indicator by the RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION 20 17520 17620 RANGE LO Low limit for switching to a low range indicator by the RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION 21 17521 17621 BIAS IN 1 0 4 IN 1 bias 22 17522 17622 GAIN IN 1 0 4 IN 1 gain 23 17523 17623 BIAS IN 2 0 4 IN 2 bias 24 17524 17624 GAIN IN 2 0 4 IN 2 gain 25 17525 17625 BIAS IN 3 0 4 IN 3 bias 26 17526 17626 GAIN IN 3 0 4 IN 3 gain 27 17527 17627 COMP HI INF 4 High limit of compensation factor f LIM 28 17528 17628 COMP_LO_ INF 4 Low limit of compensation factor f LIM IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block gt A4 8 Relative Index Index P ramet r Write Valid Initial View Description Remarks Index AR1 AR2 Mode Range Value 1 2 3 4 29 17529 17629 ARITH_ 1 to 10 0x01 1 Computation algorithm identific
216. option is used changing the internal status to Good the value of Good just before the status changed to Bad is used A2 2 2 Converting the Rate The following describes an example of rate conversion In rate conversion firstly convert the unit of two inputs to that based on seconds Next convert the unit of the inputs to the same unit to be added together The unit of IN 2 is standardized to that of IN 1 Then calculates a weight volume or energy by multiplying each input value and block execution time Because unit information is not input to the Integrator block as an input value the user must input in advance tuned values to the TIME UNIT1 2 and UNIT CONV parameters Converts the unit into that based on seconds TIME UNIT1 input m PR increment1 min xecution ti kg hour hour 3600 kg s kg E Lucan Standardizes the unit of IN 2tothatofIN 1 Because Ib s is converted into T kg s in this example the input C rts th t inte that based ur ne TS 2 value is multiplied by 0 453 1 Ib 0 453 kg TIME_UNIT2 input2 sec 1 UNIT_CONV T increment2 min 60 I x conversion factor x block execution time domin hour 3600 __ b s Conversion factor kg s kg Depunds day 86400 0 453 in this example Figure A2 2 Increment Calculation with Rate Input IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 3 A2 2 3 Conve
217. ored to its original condition its intrinsically safe or explosionproof construction may be compromised and the instrument may be hazardous to operate Please contact Yokogawa before making any repair or modification to an instrument A CAUTION This instrument has been tested and certified as being intrinsically safe or explosionproof Please note that severe restrictions apply to this instrument s construction installation external wiring maintenance and repair A failure to abide by these restrictions could make the instrument a hazard to operate WARNING Maintaining the safety of explosionproof equipment requires great care during mounting wiring and piping Safety requirements also place restrictions on maintenance and repair Please read the following sections very carefully pm c E DUI Hp S 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 3 2 8 4 FM approval a FMExplosionproof Type Caution for FM Explosionproof type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code FF1 is applicable for use in hazardous locations Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 Explosionproof for Class l Division 1 Groups B C and D e Dust ignitionproof for Class II III Division 1 Groups E F and G Enclosure rating NEMA 4X Temperature Class T6 Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Supply Voltage 32V dc max Current Draw 15 mA
218. peration Ei Ge geg Ce ee object for Alert or Trend 310 8 Server LocalAddr OxF9 0 Undefined 311 9 Publisher for PID2 LocalAddr 2 Publisher 0x21 3 Subscriber 312to 101035 Notused 6 Alert 337 7 Trend 5 StaleCountLimit Set the maximum number 6 5 2 Function Block Execution Control According to the instructions given in Section 6 3 set the execution cycle of the function blocks and schedule of execution 6 6 Block Setting Set the parameter for function block VFD 6 6 1 Link Object A link object combines the data voluntarily sent by the function block with the VCR The FVX110 has 40 link objects A single link object specifies one combination Each link object has the parameters listed in Table 6 6 Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because the modifications made to each parameter may cause inconsistent operation of consecutive stale input values which may be received before the input status is setto BAD To avoid the unnecessary mode transition caused when the data is not correctly received by subscriber set this parameter to 2 or more IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 7 6 6 2 Trend Object It is possible to set the parameter so that the function block automatically transmits Trend FVX110 has seven Trend objects six of which are used for Trend in analog mode parameters and one is used for Trend in discrete mode parameter Asingle Trend object specifies
219. pped status Out of Service Configuration change Man f you do not want to output the value and the status from IN you can manually transmit the value to OUT Auto Automatic system operation status IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 3 A1 3 Line segment Factor Determination Section When the mode is AUTO and no bit in BLOCK ERR is set the gradient and intercept of a line passing through two points that are considered line segment approximation values are determined A1 3 1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficients CURVE X CURVE Y No write error is generated with respect to the settings in CURVE X and CURVE Y However a configuration error occurs in the following cases 1 INFINITY has been configured for X1 or Y1 2 INFINITY has been configured for each X or Y 3 The values of CURVE X are not increasing in a monotone manner X1 X2 X20 X21 IF SWAP 2 is off it is acceptable if the values of CURVE Y do not increase or decrease in a monotone manner 4 The values of CURVE Y are not increasing or decreasing in a monotone manner when SWAP 2 is on If a configuration error occurs the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK ERR is set causing the mode to change to O S Example of the case where SWAP 2 is off Y Output Y6 High limit YT Low limit l l gt l x1 x2 x3 X4 X5 X6 X7 INFIN
220. r to indentify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 103 2103 IN13 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 13 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 104 2104 IN13 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 13 1000 2 105 2105 IN14 MAIN TAG PD Tag14 Use to set the Main Tag for input 14 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to indentify instruments See PD_TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 106 2106 IN14 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 14 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 107 2107 IN14 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 14 1000 2 108 2108 IN15 MAIN TAG PD Tag15 Use to set the Main Tag for input 15 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to indentify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 109 2109 IN15 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 15 Use as a memo field and set the
221. ration IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 5 Installation gt 5 1 5 Installation 5 1 Precautions Before installing the indicator read the cautionary notes in section 2 4 Selecting the Installation Location For additional information on the ambient conditions allowed at the installation location refer to section 13 1 Functional Specifications A IMPORTANT When welding piping during construction take care not to allow welding currents to flow through the indicator Do not step on this instrument after installation 5 2 Mounting m The Indicator can be mounted on a nominal 50 mm 2 inch pipe using the mounting bracket supplied as shown in Figure 5 1 Vertical pipe mounting 50 mm 2 inch pipe U bolt nut yen Cc CQ A e Mounting bracket U bolt S U bolt L Horizontal pipe mounting T OVON A PIPE Ong U bolt nut L EA Or j U bolt L JU Indicator Mounting F0501 ai Figure 5 1 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 5 Installation gt 5 2 5 3 Wiring 5 3 1 Wiring Precautions AA IMPORTANT Lay wiring as far as possible from electrical noise sources such as large capacity transformers motors and power supplies Remove the electrical connection dust cap before wiring All threaded parts must be treated with waterproofing sealant A non hardening silicone group sealant is recommended To prevent noise pickup do not pass signal and power cables through t
222. re an FVX110 works as the LAS another device cannot be connected How come A3 1 Check the following bus parameters that indicate the bus parameter as being the LAS for the FVX110 and the capabilities of being the LAS for the device that cannot be connected V ST V MID V MRD of FVX110 ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord index 385 V ST V MID V MRD of problematic device DImeBasiclnfo Then confirm that the following conditions are met FVX110 Problematic Device V ST gt V ST V MID gt V MID V MRD gt V MRD A3 2 Check the node address of the problematic device is not included in the V FUN V NUN of the FVX110 A7 9 IM 01S01C01 01EN Appendix 8 Software A8 1 Benefits of Software Download This function enables you to download software to field devices via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus to update their software Typical uses are to add new features such as function blocks and diagnostics to existing devices and to optimize existing field devices for your plant FA0801 ai Figure A8 1 Concept of Software Downloading A8 2 Specifications Steady state current Max 15 mA Current Draw Steady state 15mA max Current Draw Software Download state 24mA max Current during FlashROM blanking time Max 24 mA additional to steady state current Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification Download class Class 1 N NOTE Class 1 devices can continue the specified measurement and or control acti
223. roduits ATEX Ex sont disponibles en langue anglaise allemande et francaise Si vous n cessitez des instructions relatives aux produits Ex dans votre langue veuillez bien contacter votre repr sentant Yokogawa le plus proche Alle Betriebsanleitungen f r ATEX Ex bezogene Produkte stehen in den Sprachen Englisch Deutsch und Franz sisch zur Verf gung Sollten Sie die Betriebsanleitungen f r Ex Produkte in Ihrer Landessprache ben tigen setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrem rtlichen Yokogawa Vertreter in Verbindung Alla instruktionsb cker f r ATEX Ex explosionss kra produkter r tillg ngliga pa engelska tyska och franska Om Ni beh ver instruktioner f r dessa explosionss kra produkter pa annat spr k skall Ni kontakta n rmaste Yokogawakontor eller representant Onda ta eyxerpidia evtovpyias rov TpoidvTwv pe ATEX Ex Suozteuro ora Ayyik Peppavuce kar Poadducc Ye nepintwon Tov xpealeote o nyies oXETUKA pe Ex Or TOTLKY YAWTTR TAPAKAAOVLE ETLKOWOV OTE pE TO Thyoveotepo ypagetio THs Yokogawa avrvmp coro TNS G9 0 Q o0 0 0 V etky n vody na obsluhu pre pr stroje s ATEX Ex s k dispoz cii v jazyku anglickom nemeckom a franc zskom V pr pade potreby n vodu pre Ex pr stroje vo Va om n rodnom jazyku skontaktujte pros m miestnu kancel riu firmy Yokogawa V echny u ivatelsk p ru ky pro v robky na n se vztahuje nev bu n schv len ATEX Ex jsou dostupn v angli tin
224. row icon 4 or Y indicating the direction the scroll knob is turned will appear in the lower right corner of the display Automatically scrolling cycle will be the setting of DISPLAY CYCLE in LCD transducer block Please refer to Table 7 3 F0803 ai Figure 8 3 Screen display during continuous display switching A NOTE Turning the scroll knob 180 is only rough description Thus even if a 180 turn of the scroll knob fails to switch the displays this is nota malfunction If a 180 turn of the scroll knob fails to engage scan mode try turning the knob faster 8 3 Direction of Display Switching The direction of display switching by turning the scroll knob can be changed by SCROLL_ DIRECTION setting of the LCD transducer block In the factory default setting turning the scroll knob clockwise increases the page numbers For details refer to the instructions provided in the Section 7 3 IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 9 In Process Operation gt 9 1 9 n Process Operation This chapter describes the procedure performed when changing the operation of the function block of the FVX110 in process 9 1 Mode Transition When the function block mode is changed to Out Of Service the function block pauses and a block alarm is issued 9 2 Generation of Alarm 9 2 1 Indication of Alarm The self diagnostics function of the FVX110 uses the display to notify the user of the following three faults The Resource bloc
225. rting Accumulation This following describes an example of accumulation conversion In accumulation conversion the difference between the value executed previously and the value executed this time is integrated or accumulated This conversion applies when the output of a function block used as a counter is input to the input process of the Integrator block In order to convert the rate of change of an input to a value with an engineering unit the user must configure the factor of conversion to the appropriate engineering unit in the PULSE VAL1 and PULSE VAL2 parameters Moreover the unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN_1 in the same way as rate conversion Thus the user must also set an appropriate value to UNIT_CONV input increment1 Current read value Previous read value PULSE _VAL1 19 gt counts number of pulse x pulse value1 kg kg pulse input2 increment2 Current read value Previous read value js UNIT_CONV 18 counts number of pulse p Ib X conversion factor kg Ib pulse FA0203 ai Figure A2 3 Increment Calculation with Counter Input A2 2 4 Determining the Input Flow Direction The Integrator block also considers the input flow direction Information about the input flow direction is contained in REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 0 FORWARD 1 REVERSE In input processing the sign of the value after rate and accumulation conversion is reversed if the REV_ FLOW1 and REV FLOW2 parameters are set to REVERS
226. rting point for alarms handled by FF 912 90 1090 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 2 O s Der serving as a starting point for alarms handled by 91 1091 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 3 O e DR serving as a starting point for alarms handled by 92 1092 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 4 O Not used by the FVX110 93 1093 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 5 O Not used by the FVX110 94 1094 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 6 O Not used by the FVX110 95 1095 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 7 O Not used by the FVX110 96 1096 FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 8 O Not used by the FVX110 97 1097 FD EXTENDED MAP 1 0x0748FFFF A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE STATUS 1toFD EXTENDED ACTIVE 1 98 1098 FD EXTENDED MAP 2 OxEQOOEEEE A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE STATUS 2to FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 2 99 1099 FD EXTENDED MAP 3 OxFFOEF8FF A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE STATUS 3to FD EXTENDED ACTIVE 3 100 1100 FD EXTENDED MAP 4 Not used by the FVX110 101 1101 FD EXTENDED MAP 5 Not used by the FVX110 102 1102 FD EXTENDED MAP 6 Not used by the FVX110 103 1103 FD EXTENDED MAP 7 Not used by the FVX110 104 1104 FD EXTENDED MAP 8 Not used by the FVX110 105 1105 PRIVATE 1 Not used by the FVX110 106 1106 PRIVATE 2 Not used by the FVX110 107 1107 PRIVATE 3 Not used by the FVX110 108 1108 PRIVATE 4 Not used by the FVX110 109 1109 PRIVATE 5 Not used by the FVX110 110 1110 PRIVATE 6 Not used by the FVX110 111 1111 PRIVATE 7
227. rument If these instructions are not heeded the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired In this case Yokogawa cannot guarantee that the instrument can be safely operated Please pay special attention to the following points IM 01S01C01 01EN 1 2 lt 1 Introduction gt a Installation This instrument may only be installed by an engineer or technician who has an expert knowledge of this device Operators are not allowed to carry out installation unless they meet this condition All installation shall comply with local installation requirements and the local electrical code b Wiring The instrument must be installed by an engineer or technician who has an expert knowledge of this instrument Operators are not permitted to carry out wiring unless they meet this condition Before connecting the power cables please confirm that there is no current flowing through the cables and that the power supply to the instrument is switched off c Operation Wait 5 min after the power is turned off before opening the covers d Maintenance Please carry out only the maintenance procedures described in this manual If you require further assistance please contact the nearest Yokogawa office Care should be taken to prevent the build up of dust or other materials on the display glass and the name plate To clean these surfaces use a soft dry cloth e Explosion Protected Type Instrument Users
228. s Note 3 Operation WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WARNING WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 2 65 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLES 2 90 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing to the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx Certification IM 01S01C01 01EN b IECEx Intrinsically Safe Type Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code SS25 are applicable for use in hazardous locations No IECEx DEK 11 0004 X Applicable Standard IEC60079 0 2007 IEC60079 11 2006 IEC60079 26 2006 IEC60079 27 2008 Note 2 Ratings Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga Type of Protection II1G Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Ga Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP66 and IP67 When combined with Trapezoidal output characteristic FISCO model IIC or IIB barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 17 5 V li 500 mA Pi 5 5 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 When combined with Linear characteristic barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 24 0 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 Ex ic IIC T4
229. s CURVE X CURVE GE A1 3 A1 4 List of Signal Characterizer Block Parameters A1 5 A1 5 Application Example netten tnnt nnnn n tan ni ER ERR ERRARE ERR RER ERR A1 6 A1 5 1 le n Ire A1 6 A1 5 2 Calorie Flow Compensation sss A1 6 A1 5 3 Backward Control A1 7 Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block eere A2 1 A2 1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block eene A2 1 A2 2 Input Process Section ccecceseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeesaneeeeeeenseeenseees A2 2 A2 2 1 Determining Input Value Statuses sseees A2 2 A2 2 2 Converting the Rate A2 2 A2 2 3 Converting Accumwulation ect entnie A2 3 A2 2 4 Determining the Input Flow Direchon A2 3 IM 01S01C01 01EN A2 4 A2 5 A2 7 Appendix 3 A3 1 A3 2 A3 3 A3 4 A3 5 A3 6 Appendix 4 A4 1 A4 2 A4 3 A4 4 A4 5 Pure RR A2 3 A2 3 1 Status of Value after Addition A2 3 A232 Addition 25 eee d acta aet at tea ath Shared TRO at Rao A2 4 Jntegrator e A2 4 OUtpUt PrOCOSS A2 5 A2 5 1 Status Determination A A2 5 A2 5 2 Determining the Output Value see A2 6 A2 5 3 Mode Handling eret rei rei terrens A2 7 acl A2 7 A2 6 1 Mrs A2 7 A26 2 Reset Timing si totua rro a eee a E ere A2 8 A20 3
230. s TOTAL SP 2 An integrated value falls below 0 3 RESET IN is H 4 Every period specified in CLOCK PER for more information see CLOCK PER in A2 6 2 5 OP CMD INT is 1 The table A2 2 shows the correlation between INTEG TYPE and RESET triggers Table A2 2 RESET Triggers 1 2 3 4 5 1 UP_AUTO O x O x O 2 UP_DEM x x O x O 3 DN_AUTO x O O x O 4 DN_DEMO x x O x O 5 PERIODIC x x x O O 6 DEMAND x x O x O 7 PER amp DEM x x O O O IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 8 When OP_CMD_INT has become H and a reset was made OP_CMD_INT automatically returns to L Even if RESET IN becomes H activating a reset RESET IN does not automatically return to L The RESET IN setting will not be retained if the power is turned OFF A2 6 2 Reset Timing All items are reset during execution of the function block Therefore the minimum period of a reset is the block execution period e 5 second rule If a reset is made the next reset will not be accepted for 5 seconds after that Even if UP AUTO or DN AUTO is activated and TOTAL SP or 0 is reached within 5 seconds the next reset will not be made for 5 seconds from the previous reset e CLOCK PER IfINTEG TYPE is PERIODIC 5 or PER amp DEM 7 a reset is made at the period sec set to the CLOCK PER parameter If the value in CLOCK PER is smaller than the function block s execution period bit 1 of B
231. s of the barrier must be the type of trapezoid which are certified as the FISCO model See FISCO Rules The safety barrier may include a terminator More than one field instruments may be connected to the power supply line e FISCO Rules The FISCO Concept allows the interconnection of intrinsincally safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current li and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo Voc Vt the current lo Isc It and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit Po lt Pi Uo lt Ui los li In addition the maximum unprotected residual capacitance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 uH respectively Ci lt 5nF Li lt 10uH In each I S fieldbus segment only one active Source normally the associated apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the fieldbus system The allowed voltage Uo Voc Vt of the associated apparatus used to supply the bus cable must be limited to the range of 14 V dc to 17 5 V dc All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energ
232. s the approximation value graph of GX Output that is approximation value output and GX Input that is pH input pH with a quickly changing reaction rate can be controlled at a point near neutral 7 according to the following graph 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 CURVE_Y O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 to 100 0 to 14 pH CURVE_X FA0108 ai Figure A1 8 Approximation Curve A1 5 2 Calorie Flow Compensation Al 1 Inlet temperature Al 2 Outlet temperature Al 3 Flow rate SC Corrects the inlet and outlet temperatures AR Calculates a calorie flow rate on the basis of the difference between the corrected inlet and outlet temperatures SWAP 2 OFF FA0109 ai Figure A1 9 Calorie Flow Rate Compensation SWAP 2 Off IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block gt A1 7 A1 5 3 Backward Control SC The controlled variable output from PID is converted into an information quantity that can be interpreted by AO and backward information from AO is converted into an information quantity that can be interpreted by PID before being transmitted to the PID Al PID sc AO OUT H IN our IN 1 out_1Hcas IN BKCAL_INHOUT_2 IN_2HBKCAL_OUT SWAP_2 ON FA0110 ai Figure A1 10 Backward Control SWAP_2 On To enable backward control which inverts the X and Y axes the line segment f
233. sionproof type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code CF1 is applicable for use in hazardous locations Certificate 2325751 Applicable Standard C22 2 No 0 C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 0 5 C22 2 No 25 C22 2 No 30 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 213 C22 2 No 61010 01 04 C22 2 No 60079 0 C22 2 No 60079 1 For CSA C22 2 Explosion proof for Class Groups B C and D Dustignition proof for Class II III Groups E F and G Enclosure TYPE 4X Temperature Code T6 For CSA E60079 Flameproof for Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Ambient Temperature 50 to 75 C T6 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Supply Voltage 32 V dc max Output Signal 15 mA 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 7 Note 2 Wiring All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical Code Part and Local Electrical Codes n hazardous location wiring shall be in conduit as shown in the figure WARNING A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 50cm OF THE ENCLOSURE UN SCELLEMENT DOIT ETRE INSTALLEA MOINS DE 50cm DU BOITIER WARNING WHEN INSTALLED IN CL I DIV 2 SEAL NOT REQUIRED UNE FOIS INSTALL DANS CL I DIV 2 AUCUN JOINT N EST REQUIS Note 3 Operation WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING APR S POWER OFF ATTENDRE 5 MINUTES AVANT D OUVRIR WARNING WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 2 65 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLES 2 90 C QUAND LA TEM
234. splay 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 8 1000 2 90 2090 INO9 MAIN TAG PD Tag09 Use to set the Main Tag for input 9 Use as a memo field and setthe information you most want to display in order to inden tify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 91 2091 INO9 SUB TAG BLKO01 OUT Use the Sub Tag for input 9 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 92 2092 INO9 SCALE 100 0 Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 9 1000 2 93 2093 IN10 MAIN TAG PD Tag10 Use to set the Main Tag for input 10 Use as a memo field and set the information you most want to display in order to indentify instruments See PD TAG connected devices and other information for setup examples 94 2094 IN10 SUB TAG BLK01 OUT AUTO Use the Sub Tag for input 10 Use as a memo field and set the information to be displayed after MAIN TAG information in order to indentify instruments See block names parameter names and other information for setup examples 95 2095 IN10 SCALE 100 0 AUTO Sets scaling units and number of decimal places for display 0 0 ing bar graphs of input 10 1000 2 96 2096 IN11 MAIN TAG PD Tag11 AUTO Use to set the Main Tag for input 11 Use as a memo field and set the information you
235. splay out me of DISP PAGE INFO 0 Knob link 4sec 5sec 4sec 4sec 4sec 4sec Page number information IM 01S01C01 01EN 7 3 6 Other display settings Setting display mode after backlight off DISP QUIET_MODE This setting allows the user to set the display mode after backlight off DISP_QUIET_MODE 0 Stay at last target the display remains in the state it had before backlight off 1 Turn page cyclic engages scan mode after backlight off 2 Display off the screen is turned off after backlight off Squawk SQUAWK This function displays a notice that identifies the communicating FVX110 Executing this function alternates the screen shown in Figure 7 7 The squawk display is automatically cancelled after about a minute but can also be cancelled by turning the scroll knob ITLAR Squawk DL Ca IF Squauk F0707 ai Figure 7 7 Screen displayed during squawk operation lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 3 7 Flow chart of indicator settings Setting block that is the source of input indicator value Y Y Individual settings INXx CONNECTION xx 01 to 16 Batch settings MAIN CONNECT TYPE Y Y Making input values valid VALID CON SUMMARY Y Main Tag setting INxx MAIN TAG xx 01 to 16 A value up to 32 characters long can be set Y Main
236. splay switch 24 2024 SCROLL DIRECTION AUTO A parameter for changing scroll knob turning direction page number turning direction and turning direction of the vertical Scroll bar 0 Clockwise turn of scroll knob gt Increases page numbers 0 Counterclockwise turn of scroll knob gt Increases page numbers IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 6 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt Relative Index 25 Index 2025 Parameter Name DISP_PAGE_INFO Write Factory Default Mode Explanation Parameter for turning on or off current page numbers dis played as an xx yy fraction in the top right corner of the LCD Screen 0 On during highlighting when display screens are switched 1 Always On 2 Always On during highlighting 26 2026 DISP QUIET MODE Use to specify LCD operation after switching screens 0 Displays last output screen 1 Switches screens at specified intervals to display all screens 2 LCD display Off 27 2027 DISP_FORMAT_TYPE Not currently used 28 2028 DISPLAY_CYCLE Use to set interval when screens are switched 0 Auto automatically set depending on ambient tempera ture 1 0 5 sec 2 1 0 sec 3 2 0 sec 4 4 0 sec 29 2029 DISPLAY_TEST 0 Parameter to turn LCD test mode on and off 30 31 2030 2031 DISPLAY_CONTRAST SQUAWK 32 0x20 Parameter for setting relative brightness contrast between the L
237. sssssssss 10 2 11 Device Information eeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nennen nennt 11 1 11 1 DEVICE CH qUc 11 1 11 2 Status of Each Parameter in Failure Mode eese 11 3 T2 Parameter EC E 12 1 12 1 Resource BIOoCK rentrer ennt hano Rs RIRRRRRRRERI ER RES RRDRRR ERR RARE ARES 12 1 12 2 LCD Transducer Block rrt center cnsavestuedecerenssersseceasnerexe 12 4 13 General Specifications misssing eseria daine 13 1 13 1 Functional Specifications c cccecceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeeneeeeseeeeseeenseeenes 13 1 13 2 Physical Specifications ecucuense ERS 13 2 13 3 Model and Suffix Codes cete rente train inan cans 13 2 13 4 Optional Specifications For Explosion Protected type 13 3 13 5 Optional Specifications sson AER RN FERAS A 13 4 13 6 DimensIOnS assaiar teni oru EHE IRRRUER x REIR RA aiara aai anana kiasa ERR RR S ARR kiani 13 5 Appendix 1 Signal Characterizer SC Block A1 1 A1 1 Schematic Diagram of Signal Characterizer Block A1 1 A1 2 ele M A1 2 A1 2 1 Determining the Mode eege A1 2 A1 2 2 Judging BLOCK ERR A1 2 A1 3 Line segment Factor Determination Section A1 3 A1 3 1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficient
238. t RANGE LO See A4 2 1 Main Inputs Ifthe status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN LO is good IN LO RANGE H The status of IN LO applies IN LO2 RANGE HI See A4 2 1 Main Inputs The exception is that if RANGE LO RANGE HI the PV status is made Bad Configuration Error The input status irrelevant to the computing equation selected by ARITH TYPE will be ignored and does not affect other statuses The statuses of outputs OUT Status and PRE OUT Status are interpreted as the status of the worst input among the statuses of PV and auxiliary inputs IN 1 IN 2 and IN 3 to which INPUT OPTS has been applied Example Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 PY Good IN 1 Unceriain IN 2 Bad IN_3 Bad INPUT IN 1 Handled asa OPTS good input if its status is No option uncertain IN 2 Handled as a good input if its status is bad IN 3 No option No option ARITH TYPE 1 Flow compensation linear in A4 3 1 Computing Equations OUT Status Good Uncertain Bad IM 01S01C01 01EN Appendix 4 Arithmetic AR Block A4 6 A4 5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters Relative Index Index Paraineter Write Valid Initial View Description Remarks Index AR1 AR2 Mode Range Value 1 2 3 4 0 17500 17600 BLOCK_ O S TAG AR Information relating to this function block such as HEADER block tag DD revision and e
239. t SELECTED Indicates the input number selected using the alternatives Other Parameters OUT RANGE Sets the OUT range STATUS_OPTS Option used to specify the handling of various statuses SELECT_TYPE Determines the input selection algorithm MIN GOOD Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status If the number of inputs that are good is less than the value of MIN GOOD input selection is canceled Mode O S Allows configuration change but disables input value output Man_ Allows internal processing but the output value may vary depending on the definition of usage conditions Auto Outputs the input value The Input Selector IS block offers a maximum of eight input alternatives and generates the output according to the configured action This block generally receives inputs from the Analog Input Al function block The function of the IS block is to select a maximum minimum middle average first good or latched good signal The block combines parameter configuration DISABLE n and option first good to give priority to alternative s or to function as a rotary position switch When used as a rotary position switch the block can receive operator inputs or switch information from connected inputs The IS block supports the concept of middle selection This function outputs the average of two middle signals if even multiple valid signals are configured or a middle signal if o
240. th MODE BLK actual and is Bad B no return MODE BLK target to Cas Use Uncertain Does not regard IN as being in Bad Shed to Auto Sets MODE BLK actual to Auto 2 and as Good status when IN status is Uncertain normal return leaves MODE BLK target unchanged to prevent mode transitions from Shed to Auto Sets both MODE BLK actual and being affected when it is Uncertain no return MODE BLK target to Auto Target to Manual Automatically changes the value of Shed to Sets MODE BLK actual to Man and if BAD IN MODE BLK target to MAN when IN Manual leaves MODE BLK target unchanged falls into Bad status normal return Target to next Automatically changes the value of Shed to Sets both MODE BLK actual and permitted mode MODE BLK target to Auto or to Manual no MODE BLK target to Man if BAD CASIN ManifAuto is not set in Permitted return when CAS N falls into Bad status Shed to If Cas isin MODE BLK target sets retained MODE BLK actual to Cas and target normal leaves MODE BLK target unchanged A5 16 Auto Fallback return If Cas is not setin MODE BLK target Sch s sets MODE BLK actual to Auto and Auto fallback denotes an action in which a PID leaves MODE BLK target unchanged block changes mode from Cas to Auto and Shed to If Cas is setin MODE BLK target sets continues automatic PID control with the user set retained both MODE BLK actual and MODE setpoint Auto fallback takes place automatically target no amber a to one BR Wan retur
241. the trend of one parameter Each Trend object has the parameters listed in Table 6 8 The first four parameters are the items to be set Before writing to a Trend object it is necessary to release the WRITE_LOCK parameter Table 6 7 Parameters for Trend Objects Sub index Parameter Description 1 Block Index Sets the leading index of the function block that takes a trend 2 Parameter Relative Sets the index of Index parameters taking a trend by a value relative to the beginning of the function block 3 Sample Type Specifies how trends are taken Choose one of the following 2 types 1 Sampled upon execution of a function block 2 The average value is sampled 4 Sample Interval Specifies sampling intervals in units of 1 32 ms Set the integer multiple of the function block execution cycle 5 Last Update The last sampling time 6to List of Status Status part of a sampled 21 parameter 21 to List of Samples Data part of a sampled 37 parameter Seven trend objects are factory set as shown Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Trend Object are Factory Set Index Parameters Factory Settings 32000 to TREND FLT 1 to Not used 32005 TREND FLT 5 32006 TREND DIS 1 Not used 6 6 3 View Object This object forms a group of parameters in a block One advantage brought by forming groups of parameters is the reduction of load for data transactions View
242. ther function block s This type of communication is called BNU Buffered Network triggered Unidirectional VCR Subscriber BNU VCR A Subscriber receives output of another function block s by MAO block or PID block A Server VCR is capable to responding to requests from a Client QUB VCR after the Client successfully initiates connection to the Server A Source VCR transmits data without established connection A Sink QUU VCR on another device can receive it if the Sink is configured so A Publisher VCR transmits data when LAS requests So An explicit connection is established from Subscriber BNU VCR s so that a Subscriber knows the format of published data Each VCR has the parameters listed in Table 6 4 Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because modification of individual parameters may cause inconsistent operation IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 5 Table 6 4 VCR Static Entry Sub index 1 Parameter FasArTypeAndRole Description Indicates the type and role of communication VCR The following 4 types are used for FVX110 0x32 Server Responds to requests from host 0x44 Source Transmits alarm or trend 0x66 Publisher Sends Al block output of field device to other blocks 0x76 Subscriber Receives output of other blocks by MAO block or PID block FasDllLocalAddr Sets the local address to specify VCR in FVX110 Arange of 20 to
243. tion use the write lock switch Hard W Lock or the WRITE_LOCK index 1034 Soft W Lock The CPU assembly of the FVX110 is provided with a write lock switch switch 2 in Figure 9 5 Setting switch 2 to On activates the write lock function to prevent changes to block parameters of WRITE LOCK LEVEL index 1064 Table 9 4 shows how WRITE LOCK LEVEL relates to the block targeted by write lock In the factory default setting WRITE LOCK LEVEL is 2 preventing writing to the LCD transducer block resource block and function block To enable the switch lock function set Hard W Lock bit 4 of FEATURE SEL index 1018 to 1 On The factory default for Hard W Lock bit 4 is 0 Off Table 9 4 Relationship between WRITE LOCK LEVEL and block targeted by write lock WRITE LOCK LEVEL Block targeted by Write lock All parameters for the LCD transducer block and FEATURE 0 SEL and WRITE LOCK LEVEL parameter settings for FEATURE SEL All parameters for the LCD 1 transducer block and resource block All function block parameters 2 Factory default in addition to WRITE LOCK LEVEL 1 3 MIB and VCR in addition to WRITE LOCK LEVEL 2 When the write lock switch is disabled set 2 enabled for WRITE LOCK index 1034 of the resource block to enable the write lock function To enable the write lock function using the WRITE LOCK setting FEATURE SEL index 1018 of th
244. tions defined in FEATURES bit0 Scheduled bit1 Event driven bit2 Manufacturer specified 19 1019 CYCLE TYPE Scheduled Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource IM 01S01C01 01EN 12 2 lt 12 Parameter Lists gt Relative Write Index Index Parameter Name Factory Default Mode Explanation 20 1020 CYCLE SEL Scheduled Used to select the block execution method for this resource 21 1021 MIN CYCLE T 3200 100ms Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable 22 1022 MEMORY SIZE 0 Available configuration memory in the empty resource To be checked before attempting a download 23 1023 NV CYCLE T 0 Interval between writing copies of nonvolatile parameters to non volatile memory Zero means never 24 1024 FREE SPACE 0 Percent of memory available for further configuration FVX110 has zero which means a preconfigured resource 25 1025 FREE TIME 0 Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks FVX110 does not support this 26 1026 SHED RCAS 640000 20S Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations Supported only with PID function 27 1027 SHED ROUT 640000 20S Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations Supported only with PID f
245. to 1311 Imesh ws 1347 m3 s We Wis Ue m m 1312 Im m2 is mod 1348 m3 min i mur m 1313 Im W o m wW 1349 m3 h m3 h 1314 Ix EX 1350 m3 d m d 1315 lxes x 8 1351 L s LI s L 316 cd c a 1352 L min um c d 1317 cd m2 om 1353 L h Lo h 1318 g s g s 1354 L d L d 1319 g min MUN 1355 ML d BEZE 1320 g h g h 1356 CFS CFs 1321 g d g d 1357 CFM C F M IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 7 Explanation of Basic Items 7 14 Index Unit Display on the LCD Index Unit Display on the LCD J 1358 CFH C FH 1394 J mol E n E 2 k J 1359 ft3 d d 1395 kJ mol mo I C F M J od 1360 CFM 0 C 1atm Ss 1396 J mol k mol K C F H m o 1361 CFH 0 C 1atm C S 1397 mol m3 p m a I m o I 1362 gal s I I s 1398 mol dm3 d m m o I 1363 GPM GPM 1399 mol L L a l m o I 1364 gal h 9 h 1400 mol kg kg a l m m o I 1365 gal d E l d 1401 mmol kg kg M a I 1366 Mgal d d d 1402 Bq B q l G a i 1367 IGal s fos 1403 MBq MBq Ga 1368 IGal min et h 1404 kBq k Bq I Ga B 1369 IGal h rh 1405 Bq kg h k g I Ga k B 1370 IGal d d 1406 kBq kg g b P M B 1371 bbl s NT 1407 MBq kg g b Jb 1372 bb min i min 1408 Gy G y b P 1373 bbl h h 1409 mGy m G y b b 1374 bbl d d 1410 rad e dd k W 1375
246. tor held Terminal Data Ned x Field Instruments Passive O U O l F0204 ai I S fieldbus system complying with FISCO model IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 2 Handling Cautions gt e installation Diagram for Nonincendive Division 2 Installation Terminator oua Ea eee on 4 O lo Indicator Oc d Ee E Field Instruments o rd E ar anui esae cadi uud t S A QA ide i Lo erageet Seitert E j 1 Field Instruments kb EE sa Sg 4 Hazardous Location Ee l Non Hazardous Location Terminator J e Ee FM Approved Oo O Associated Nonincendive Field ie te ge General Purpose MU at I Equipment i It or Isc 1 I Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Ca SIS i Installation should be in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Article 500 F0205 ai The configuration of Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus must be FM Approved Approved under FNICO Concept Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installed in Class II and Class III environments Associated Apparatus manufacturer s installation drawing must be followed when installing this apparatus No revision to drawing without prior FM Approvals Terminator must be FM Approved The nonincendive field wiring circuit concept allows interconect
247. ttings To use the FVX110 as a field indicator information Main Tag and Sub Tag identifying field instruments units bar graph scaling and other parameters must be set to enable display on the FVX110 Selection of function block to receive output signals from field instruments MAIN_CONNECT_YTPE INxx_CONNECTION Select function block to receive output signals from field instruments from MAO or IS function block Batch settings should start from the MAIN_ CONNECT_TYPE parameter in the LCD transducer block To use the MAO function block to receive all 16 inputs select 1 All connects to MAO FB to use the IS function block select 2 All connects to ISEL FB and to use a simulation instruction for all inputs select 3 All are in simulate To set a separate input source start from the INxx CONNECTION parameter in the LCD transducer block To use the MAO function block to receive inputs IN 01 to IN 08 set 1 from MAO FB 1 INxx xx 01 08 To use the IS function block to receive the same inputs set 2 from ISEL FB 1 INxx xx 01 08 To use the MAO function block to receive inputs from IN 09 to IN 16 set 1 from MAO FB 2 INxx xx 09 16 To use the IS function block to receive the same inputs set 2 from ISEL FB 2 INxx xx 09 16 Select 0 In simulate for all inputs to perform a simulation instruction A NOTE Selecting 0 All are in simulate or 0 In simulate will display directly input test input values for IN xxon th
248. uator Or process environment may be temporarily non conforming Temporal decrease of value quality Check process or peripherals Check process and peripherals conditions Deterioration estimated by Time Based Maintenance Check deterioration Check if maintenance is required Deterioration estimated by Condition Based Maintenance Check deterioration Check if maintenance is required Optional function configuration error Alarm related information Check optional configuration Confirm information Check configuration of optional functions Check the alarm related information Process alarm Check process Check process conditions IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 9 In Process Operation gt 9 4 9 3 Device Diagnostic Simulation Function It is possible to conduct testing for the downstream function blocks or alarm processes ASIMULATE ENABLE switch is mounted in the FVX110 amplifier This is to prevent the accidental operation of this function When this is switched on simulation is enabled See Figure 9 4 To initiate the same action from a remote terminal if REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is written to the SIM ENABLE MSG parameter index 1044 of the resource block the resulting action is the same as is taken when the above switch is on In simulation enabled status an alarm is generated from the resource block and other device alarms will be masked for this reason the simulati
249. unction 28 1028 FAULT STATE 1 Condition set by loss of communication to an output block failure promoted to an output block or a physical contact When fail safe condition is set then output function blocks will perform their FSAFE actions 29 1029 SET FSTATE 1 Allows the fail safe condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set 30 1030 CLR FSTATE 1 Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fail safe state if the field condition if any has cleared 31 1031 MAX NOTIFY 4 Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible 32 1032 LIM NOTIFY 4 Maximum number of alarm information which FVX110 can transfer at the same time Setting of this parameter restrict number of alarm transfer to the HOST and prevent HOST from overflow 33 1033 CONFIRM TIM 64000 20S The minimum time between retries of alert reports 34 1034 WRITE LOCK Not locked If set no writes from anywhere are allowed except to clear WRITE LOCK Block inputs will continue to be updated 35 1035 UPDATE EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 36 1036 BLOCK ALM The block alarm is used for all configuration hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task another block alert may be reported without cl
250. unction must be set so that the elements of the curve increase in a monotone manner As shown in Figure A1 11 If they do not increase in a monotone manner the mode changes to O S disabling calculation No CURVE_X CURVE_Y 1 5 5 2 10 10 3 15 11 4 20 20 5 25 25 6 30 26 7 35 30 8 40 40 9 45 45 10 50 50 11 51 51 12 52 54 13 53 59 14 54 66 15 55 75 16 65 80 17 75 81 18 80 85 19 85 86 20 90 90 21 95 95 100 90 80 70 60 50 CURVE Y 40 30 20 10 Line segment function 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 CURVE_X X_RANGE 100 0 0x00 Y_RANGE 100 0 0x00 FA0111 ai Figure A1 11 Setting Example of a Line segment Function IM 01S01C01 01EN lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt A2 1 Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block The Integrator IT block adds two main inputs and integrates them for output The block compares the integrated or accumulated value to TOTAL SP and PRE TRIP and generates discrete output signals OUT TRIP or OUT PTRIP when the limits are reached The output is as represented by the following equation for counting upward and rate conversion OUT Value Integration start value Total Total Total Current Integral Current Integral x y x At X IN 1 value whose unit has been converted y IN 2 value whose unit has been converted
251. us of the increment is Bad After a reset rejects the next reset until Confirm is set to RESET CONFIRM Generates an alert event at reset 3 Flow reverse 4 Use uncertain 5 Use bad 6 Carry 7 Add zero if bad 8 Confirm reset 9 Generate reset event 10 to Reserved 15 If both forward and reverse flows are enabled or disabled both forward and reverse flows are integrated 30 CLOCK PER 2 7 sec Specify the period at which a periodic reset is made 31 PRE TRIP 100000 0 Set an allowance applied before an integrated value exceeds the setpoint 32 N RESET 0 0 Indicates the number of resets in the range of 0 to 999999 33 PCT INCL 0 0 The ratio of the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments whose status is Good to the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments irrelevant to the status Equation 34 GOOD_LIM 0 0 The threshold value of the ratio of the integrated values of the increments whose status is Good to all integrated values in which the status of OUT is Good 35 36 UNCERT_LIM OP_CMD_INT 0 0 The threshold value of the ratio of the integrated values of the increments whose status is Good to all the integrated values in which the status of OUT is Uncertain Operator command that resets integrated values 37 OUTAGE_LIM
252. uted 11 STATUS 0 O S 2 Allows you to select a status related option OPTS The Integrator block uses Uncertain if Man mode only 12 IN 1 0 0 5 5 Inputs flow Rate Accum signals from the Al block or PID block 13 IN 2 0 0 5 5 14 OUT TRIP 0 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value has exceeded the setpoint 15 OUT PTRIP 0 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value is reaching the setpoint 16 TIME UNIT1 sec 1 MAN 1 Set the time unit of the rate kg s Ib min kg h etc of the corresponding 17 TIME UNIT2 sec 1 MAN 1 IN 18 UNIT CONV 1 0 4 Specify the unit conversion factor for standardizing the unit of IN 2 into thatofIN 1 19 PULSE VAL1 1 0 MAN 4 Setthe factor for converting the number of pulses for the corresponding 20 PULSE VAL2 1 0 MAN 4 IN into an appropriate engineering unit 21 REV FLOW1 0 2 2 Selector switch used to specify the fluid flow direction forward reverse 22 REV FLOW2 0 2 2 with respect to the corresponding IN 23 RESET IN 0 2 2 The parameter that receives a reset request from an external block to reset the integrated values 24 STOTAL 0 0 4 Indicates the snapshot of OUT just before a reset 25 RTOTAL 0 0 MAN 4 4 Indicates the integrated value of the absolute values of the increments if the input status is Bad IM 01S01C01 01EN A2 10 lt Appendix 2 Integrator IT Block gt Index 26 Parameter Name SRTOTAL Initial
253. ution Upon completion of the activation the target fieldbus device performs resetting internally which temporarily halts fieldbus communication and function block executions Be especially careful about a valve positioner the output air pressure will fall to the minimum level i e zero A CAUTION Do not turn off the power to a field device or disconnect the download tool during a download or activation The device may fail as a result A NOTE Be careful about the noise on the fieldbus link If the fieldbus is noisy the downloading may take a very long time or fail A8 5 Download Files Download files have the following filenames with the filename extension of ffd Take care to choose the correct download file for the target field device 594543 device family device type domain name _ software name _ software revision ffd For example the name of the download file for an FVX110 may have the following name 5945430010_0010_FVX110_ORIGINAL_ R101 ffd Refer to A8 10 3 DOMAIN HEADER about each keyword of the file name The device type is 0010 for an FVX110 The software name is ORIGINAL or UPDATE The former indicates an original file and the latter an update file Whenever performing a download to update the device revision obtain the original file In general an addition to the parameters or blocks requires a device revision update IM 01S01
254. values of these two inputs is output Not writable IFSELECT TYPE is MIDDLE The value of the input positioned in the middle of the values of There is an odd multiple number of valid inputs odd multiple valid inputs is output Not writable If SELECT TYPE is AVERAGE The value obtained by dividing the added value of the values of valid inputs by the number of these inputs is output Not writable IFSELECT TYPE is Latched Good The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is output Not writable Table A3 4 Condition and Mode Condition Listed in priority sequence If the Actual is in O S Mode If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_OPTS is set and the Actual is in Man If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_OPTS is not set and the Actual is in Man Values specified by MIN_Good gt the number of valid inputs If there is no valid input If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS OPTS is set If the value of OP SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum number of inputs If OP SELECT has selected IN whose status is bad or uncertain See the item Transition of Sub status in the Case Where OP SELECT is Selected Aute If the value is out ofthe SELECT TYPE setting range when the value of OP SELECT
255. wer consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc lt 2 Handling Cautions gt 2 11 e Entity Model Non Hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit and Terminator Safety Barrier b Exi ou oi U I VJ Terminator Hand held Data Terminal Nd Field Instruments Passive F0210 ai I S fieldbus system complying with Entity model I S values Power supply field device Pos Pi Uo lt Ui lo lt li Calculation of max allowed cable length Ccable lt Co Ci gt Ci Terminator Lcable lt Lo SLi Number of Devices The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the power consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc b CENELEC ATEX KEMA Flameproof Type Caution for CENELEC ATEX KEMA flameproof type Note 1 FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator with optional code KF25 for potentially explosive atmospheres No KEMA 10ATEX0157 Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 2006 EN 60079 1 2004 EN 61241 0 2006 EN 61241 1 2004 Type of Protection and Marking Code Ex d IIC T6 Ex tD A21 IP6x T80 Group Il Category 2G 2D Temperature Class T6 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Ambient Temperature for gas proof 50 to 75 C T6 15 C when O ring material is Fluoro rubber Maximum Surface Temperature for dust
256. x Parameter Default P e as Index PID1 PID2 Name factory setting Write Valid Range Description 45 8045 8145 ALARM SUM Enable The current alert status unacknowledged states unreported states and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block 46 8046 8146 ACK OPTION OxFFFF Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 47 8047 8147 ALARM HYS 0 596 0 to 50 Hysteresis for alarm detection and resetting to prevent each alarm from occurring and recovering repeatedly within a short time 48 8048 8148 HI_HI_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of HI_HI_ALM alarm 49 8049 8149 HI_HI_LIM INF PV_SCALE Setting for HI_HI_ALM alarm 50 8050 8150 HI_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of HI ALM alarm 51 8051 8151 HI LIM INF PV SCALE Setting for HI ALM alarm 52 8052 8152 LO PRI 0 Oto 15 Priority order of LO ALM alarm 53 8053 8153 LO UM INF PV SCALE Setting for LO ALM alarm 54 8054 8154 LO LO PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of LO LO ALM alarm 55 8055 8155 LO LO LIM INF PV SCALE Setting for LO LO ALM alarm 56 8056 8156 DV HI PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of DV HI ALM alarm 57 8057 8157 DV HI LIM INF Setting for DV HI ALM alarm 58 8058 8158 DV LO PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of DV LO ALM alarm 59 8059 8159 DV LO LIM INF Setting for DV LO ALM alarm 60 8060 8160 HI HI ALM Alarm that is generated when the PV value has exceeded the H
257. xample of Loop Connecting Function Block of FVX110 and Two EJX with Other Instruments Macrocycle Control Period FIC100 H OUT nication Commu Schedule Scheduled Communication F0603 ai Function Block Schedule and Communication Schedule Figure 6 3 When the control period macrocycle is set to more than 4 seconds set the following intervals to be more than 196 of the control period nterval between end of block execution and start of sending CD from LAS nterval between end of block execution and start of the next block execution IM 01S01C01 01EN lt 6 Configuration gt 6 4 6 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses This section describes the steps in the procedure to set PD Tags and node addresses in the FVX110 There are three states of Fieldbus devices as shown in Figure 6 4 and if the state is other than the lowest SM OPERATIONAL state no function block is executed FVX110 must be transferred to this state when an FVX110 tag or address is changed UNINITIALIZED No tag nor address is set Tag clear Tag setting INITIALIZED Only tag is set Address clear Address setting SM OPERATIONAL Tag and address are retained and the function block can be executed F0604 ai Figure 6 4 Status Transition by Setting PD Tag and Node Address FVX110 has a PD Tag UT1001 and node address 245 or hexadecimal F5 that are set upon shipment from the fa
258. xecution time 1 17501 17601 ST REV Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the Arithmetic block If a setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 17502 17602 TAG DESC A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 17503 17603 STRATEGY Auniversal parameter intended for use by a high level system to identify function blocks 4 17504 17604 ALERT KEY Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has occurred Generally this parameter is used by a high level System to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to separate necessary alerts only This is one of the universal parameters 5 17505 17605 MODE BLK A universal parameter representing the operation status of the Arithmetic block It consists of the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 6 17506 17606 BLOCK Indicates the error status relating to the Arithmetic ERR block The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 1 Block Configuration Error Bit 15 O S mode 7 17507 17607 PV The result of a range extension function is substituted into this When viewed from the computing equation PV is the main input 8 17508 17608 OUT MAN Block output 9 17509 17609 PRE OUT 0 5 5 Always indicates the calculation result The value is 10 17510 17610
259. y to the System except to a leakage current of 50 pA for each connected device Supply unit Trapezoidal or rectangular output characteristic only Uo 14 17 5 V I S maximum value lo according to spark test result or other assessment No specification of Lo and Co is required on the certificate or label Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance R 15 150 O km Inductance per unit length L 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length C 45 200 nF km C 2C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating or C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line Length of spur cable max 60 m Length of trunk cable max 1 km Group IIC or 5 km Group IIB Length of splice max 1m Terminators At each end of the trunk cable an FM approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 100 O C 0 2 2 mF System evaluations The number of passive device like transmitters actuators hand held terminals connected to a single bus segment is not limited due to I S reasons Furthermore if the above rules are respected the inductance and capacitance of the cable need not to be considered and will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation HAZARDOUS AREA SAFE AREA Supply Unit and Safety Barrier FISCO Model Terminator FISCO Model Es Exi U UN a Hand Termina
260. ze 3 Manufacturer ID 6 Indicates the value of resource block s MANUFAC ID manufacturer ID as character string data 4 Device Family 4 Indicates the device family With this product Device Family indicates the value of resource blocks DEV TYPE as character string data 5 Device Type 4 Indicates the value of resource block s DEV TYPE as character string data 6 Device Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block s DEV REV 7 DD Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block s DD REV 8 Software Revision 8 Indicates the value of resource block s SOFT REV 9 Software Name 8 Indicates the attribute of the binary file With this product Software Name indicates either of the following ORIGINAL followed by one space Original file UPDATE followed by two spaces Update file 10 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicates the field device name IM 01S01C01 01EN Revision Information Title FVX110 Fieldbus Segment Indicator Manual No IM 01S01C01 01EN Edition Revised Item 1st Nov 2010 New publication 2nd July 2011 Add Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive approval type 2 3 to 2 14 Add applicable standard and certificate number for each approval 13 3 Add code for Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive approval type of the chart Revise the specification of Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive approval type IM 01S01C01 01EN

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

質量，容量の正確な計量  MXZ-8B140,160VA MXZ-8B140,160YA  Samsung DVD-P365H User Manual  DS41  User's Manual - Tell Software Kft.  ABUS TVAC40620      Jet Tools AFS-400 User's Manual  Philips HTD3250  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file